Yamaha RX V667 Owner's Manual
User Manual: Yamaha RX-V667 Owner's Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .Page Count: 144
Owner’s Manual
AV Receiver
English for U.S.A.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
Connecting the FM/AM antennas .................................. 32
Features and capabilities ................................................... 4
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically
(YPAO).............................................................................. 33
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit ............................. 5
View or modify content for the current input source
........................................................... 5
Configuring settings for this unit
...................................................... 5
Adjust settings for each input source
............................................................. 6
About this manual............................................................. 7
Supplied accessories......................................................... 7
Part names and functions.................................................. 8
Front panel........................................................................ 8
Rear panel......................................................................... 9
Front panel display ......................................................... 10
Remote control ............................................................... 11
On-screen display ........................................................... 12
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers ........................................................ 13
Speaker channels and functions...................................... 13
Speaker layout ................................................................ 14
Connecting speakers and subwoofer .............................. 17
Connecting external components.................................... 21
Cable plugs and jacks ..................................................... 21
Connecting a TV monitor............................................... 22
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices ............ 25
Connecting game consoles ............................................. 29
Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder .................................................... 29
Connecting an external amplifier ................................... 30
Connecting a SCENE link
playback-compatible device ........................................... 30
Using the Trigger function to link
external component power.............................................. 31
Connecting audio/video recording devices..................... 31
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure ............................................... 40
Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 40
Changing input settings with a single key
(SCENE function) ............................................................ 41
Registering input sources/sound program ...................... 41
Enjoying the desired sound field effect .......................... 41
Selecting sound programs and sound decoders.............. 41
Sound programs.............................................................. 45
Configuring the settings of this unit
while viewing the TV screen ........................................... 47
Basic operations via the TV screen display ................... 47
Confirming and operating Sirius Satellite Radio™
from the Content window .............................................. 63
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 65
Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock................. 65
Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 65
Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu screen
(Menu browse control)................................................... 66
Operating basic playback functions
via the remote control (Simple remote control) ............. 68
Playing back iPod™/iPhone™
with wireless connection................................................ 68
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components ...... 70
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver................................................... 70
Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 70
Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 71
Configuring settings specific to
an individual input source (OPTION menu)................. 49
OPTION menu display and setup................................... 49
OPTION menu ............................................................... 50
Confirming and operating input sources
from the Content window ............................................... 53
Displaying the Content window on the TV screen......... 53
Switching the display between the Now playing view
and the Content browse view ......................................... 53
FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 54
Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 54
Confirming and operating the FM/AM tuner
from the Content window............................................... 56
Listening to Satellite Radio ............................................. 58
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner........................... 58
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription ........ 59
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ............................. 59
Registering and recalling the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
channels.......................................................................... 60
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
information ..................................................................... 62
En
2
SETUP
Configuring input sources (Input menu) ....................... 72
Configuring input sources .............................................. 72
Input menu...................................................................... 73
Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu) ............... 76
Editing a scene................................................................ 76
SCENE menu.................................................................. 77
Setting sound program parameters
(Sound Program menu) ................................................... 78
Editing sound programs.................................................. 78
CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 79
Parameters usable in certain sound programs ................ 81
Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 82
Setting various functions (Setup menu) ......................... 83
Operating the Setup menu .............................................. 83
Setup menu ..................................................................... 84
Manages settings for speakers ........................................ 84
Setting the audio output function of this unit ................. 88
Setting this unit’s video output function......................... 89
Setting HDMI functions ................................................. 90
Setting this unit’s multi-zone function ........................... 92
Making the receiver easier to use ................................... 93
Language ........................................................................ 94
Confirming information of this unit
(Information menu) ......................................................... 95
Selecting information ..................................................... 95
Controlling other components
with the remote control.................................................... 96
Keys connecting external components ........................... 96
Default remote control code settings.............................. 97
Registering remote control codes for
external component operations....................................... 97
Resetting all remote control codes ................................. 98
Avoiding crossing remote control signals
when using multiple Yamaha receivers ........................ 100
Resetting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
parental lock code......................................................... 100
Changing TV format .................................................... 101
Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits......... 101
Initializing various settings for this unit....................... 101
Using the HDMI Control function ............................... 102
Using multi-zone configuration .................................... 105
Connecting Zone2 ........................................................ 105
Controlling Zone2 ........................................................ 106
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting ............................................................. 107
General ......................................................................... 107
HDMI™ ....................................................................... 109
Tuner (FM/AM) ........................................................... 110
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™............................................. 110
iPod™/iPhone™ .......................................................... 111
Bluetooth™ .................................................................. 112
Remote control ............................................................. 112
Glossary .......................................................................... 113
Audio information ........................................................ 113
Sound program information ......................................... 114
Video information ........................................................ 114
Video conversion .......................................................... 115
Information on HDMI™ ............................................... 116
About trademarks.......................................................... 116
Specifications.................................................................. 117
Index ............................................................................... 119
Extended functionality that can be configured
as needed (Advanced Setup menu)................................. 99
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu ............... 99
Setting the impedance of speakers ................................. 99
En
3
INTRODUCTION
Features and capabilities
■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 7-channel amplifier
■ 6 HDMI input jacks (5 + 1 VIDEO AUX) supporting Audio Return Channel and 3D
video signal
■ 1-button input/sound program switching (SCENE function)................................41
■ Speaker connections for 2- to 7.1-channel configurations
–
–
–
–
–
–
Speaker impedance configuration............................................................................................................18
Speaker channels and functions ...............................................................................................................13
Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................14
Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................17
Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................20
High quality playback using bi-amplification connections .....................................................................18
■ Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters
(YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) ......................................33
■ External component connection (max. 16 inputs) and playback
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
External component connection...............................................................................................................21
Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................7
Configuring the settings specific for each input source .............................................49
Playback from external components........................................................................................................40
Playback from an iPod/iPhone with wired connection ............................................................................65
Playback from an iPod/iPhone with wireless connection ........................................................................68
Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................70
■ Front panel information display/on-screen display (OSD) on the TV screen
– Switching information on the front panel display ...................................................................................10
– Operating this unit using the on-screen display.......................................................................................12
■ Volume adjustment functions
– Easy listening at low volumes ....................................................................................51
– Adjusting volume between input sources .....................................................................52
■ Remote control operation
– External component operation with this unit’s remote control................................................................96
■ Playing back the audio source in another room
–
–
–
–
Using the internal amplifier for playback ................................................................................................18
Using the external amplifier for playback .............................................................................................105
Configuring the settings for another room.............................................................................................105
Controlling the external component in another room ............................................................................106
■ Other features
– Standby mode after a specific amount of time .................................................................11
– Charging the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode ..........................74
Most of this unit’s functions can be operated by following instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Refer to “Using the TV OSD to operate the unit” on the following pages for information on
functions that can be controlled using the on-screen display.
■ FM/AM tuner
–
–
–
–
Receiving an FM/AM broadcast ..............................................................................................................54
Presetting stations ....................................................................................................................................54
Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................54
Changing FM mode (Stereo/Mono).........................................................................................................56
■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
– Receiving a channel .................................................................................................................................59
– Presetting channels ..................................................................................................................................60
– Displaying information ............................................................................................................................62
■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback
–
–
–
–
Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................41
Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................42
Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................42
Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................44
En
4
INTRODUCTION
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit
This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) for the TV screen. The OSD is designed to enable visual guidance that simplifies operations. The OSD mainly displays the ON SCREEN and
OPTION menus, as well as the Content window that displays the content of current input sources.
■ Select an input source, SCENE and sound program
– Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................47
– Select a SCENE .......................................................................................................................................48
– Select a sound program............................................................................................................................48
■ Select and configure a SCENE
– Select a SCENE .......................................................................................................................................48
– Register or clear settings for a selected SCENE , .........................................................77
– Turn on a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD player connected to this unit automatically
when a SCENE is selected ................................................................................................77
View or modify content for the current input source
■ Select and adjust a sound program (sound program)
■ Operate the AM/FM tuner or SIRIUS Satellite Radio
■ Display settings information for this unit
– Display a list of preset stations/channels for selection ......................................................................57, 64
– Display information on the station/channel currently received .........................................................56, 63
– Perform operations such as searching for and registering stations/channels
using the Utility ..................................................................................................................56, 63
■ Display the list of iPod music sources
– Display the list of iPod music sources for selection ................................................................................66
– Perform operations such as play, stop and pause using the TV screen ............66
– Perform basic playback functions such as play, stop and pause
via the remote control .....................................................................................68
Configuring settings for this unit
– Display the ON SCREEN menu on the TV screen..................................................................................47
■ Select and configure an input source
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................47
Play the audio/video signal from the selected input source.....................................................................40
Change the input source name ...........................................................................73
Select the audio input jack separately from the video input jack .........................................74
Specify a format for digital audio signals ...................................................................74
Enhance the sound of compressed audio .............................................................................74
Output a video signal input from another input source
while playing a multi-channel audio signal .......................................................................75
– Charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode ......................................74
– Select a sound program............................................................................................................................48
– Adjust sound program parameters ...........................................................................................................78
– Display audio signal information ..................................................................................95
– Display video signal information ..................................................................................95
– Display HDMI signal information ..................................................................95
■ Adjust acoustic parameters to match your speakers and listening environment
– Specify speaker acoustic parameters automatically
(Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer - YPAO).......................................................................33
– Set up this unit’s speaker configuration simply ..................................................84
– Specify settings for each speaker .................................................................................85
– Control volume control for each speaker ..................................................................................86
– Apply speaker distance settings ...........................................................................................86
– Control equalizer sound quality ..................................................................................87
– Adjust test tone speaker ......................................................................................................87
■ Adjust audio signals output from this unit
–
–
–
–
–
Correct lag between audio and video signals ........................................................................88
Select a dynamic range adjustment method .............................................................88
Specify the maximum volume .......................................................................................88
Specify the initial volume ............................................................................................89
Adjust DSP effect and volume level ..................................................................89
■ Adjust video signals output from this unit
– Convert analog video signal to another type of signal .......................89
– Specify the resolution and aspect ratio of analog video signal converted to HDMI or specify upscaling
resolution for 480i/576i- or 480p/576p-HDMI output signal ...........................................90
En
5
INTRODUCTION
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit
■ HDMI settings
–
–
–
–
Assign the audio input source for the TV .................................................................91
Listen to TV audio with HDMI cable connection ..............................91
Transmit HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode ...............................92
Change the output destination of HDMI input audio signals .......................................92
■ Enable listening in multiple rooms (multi-zone function)
– Adjust Zone2 volume .........................................................................................................92
■ Specify other functions for this unit
–
–
–
–
Enter standby mode automatically when no operations are performed ................93
Adjust the brightness of the front panel display ...................................................................93
Change the wall paper displayed on the TV screen ..........................................................93
Specify the function of the TRIGGER OUT jack for controlling external components
.....................................................................................................................................94
– Prohibit changes to settings .......................................................................................94
■ Select a language
– Change the language displayed on the TV screen ..............................................................94
Adjust settings for each input source
–
–
–
–
–
–
Display the OPTION menu on the TV screen .........................................................................................49
Select the 5.1-channel signal playback method ...................................................51
Adjust bass and treble levels .........................................................................................50
Enable low-volume background music .......................................................................51
Adjust the volume of input sources ...............................................................................52
Adjust the vertical position of dialogues ......................................................................51
En
6
INTRODUCTION
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit
About this manual
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• This manual is created prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and
product, the product has priority.
• “dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the
remote control. Refer to the “Remote control” (☞p. 11) for the
information about each position of the parts.
• J1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the
corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page.
• ☞ indicates the page describing the related information.
• Click on the “
” at the bottom of the page to display the
corresponding page in “Part names and functions.”
Front panel
Rear panel
Front panel display
Remote control
Supplied accessories
■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (supplied)
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input
cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks.
To remove the cover, push the left section of it.
When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the
battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote
control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery
compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+
and -).
a
Battery compartment
cover
b
Attach the cover
Battery compartment
Replace the batteries with new ones if the remote control can
only be operated within a narrow range.
NOTE
PUSH
Check that you received all of the following parts.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote control
Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2
YPAO microphone
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
VIDEO AUX input cover
c
Remove the cover
If there are remote control codes for external components
registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more
than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote
control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur,
replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control
codes.
En
7
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
e ZONE CONTROL
Front panel
a MAIN ZONE A (MAIN ZONE Power)
b
c
d
Switches this unit between on and standby mode.
HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator
Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby
mode.
• When the Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video
from an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV
during standby mode (☞p. 92).
• When an iPod/iPhone, which is placed in the Yamaha iPod universal
dock, is charging while the unit is in standby mode (☞p. 68).
This indicator also lights up when the Yamaha iPod wireless receiver
is connected to this unit (☞p. 68).
YPAO MIC jack
Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker balance
automatically (☞p. 33).
ZONE2
When this unit is connected to an external amplifier located in another
room, this key switches that amplifier between on and standby
(☞p. 106).
When speakers in another room are connected to this unit, this key
switches the built-in amplifier for those speakers on and off
(☞p. 106).
a
b c
MAIN ZONE
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m PHONES jack
Switches to Zone2 operation mode. This unit, or its remote control,
can be used to select input sources or adjust volume for an external
amplifier in another room or the built-in amplifier for speakers in
another room (☞p. 106).
INFO
Changes the information displayed on the front panel display
(☞p. 10).
MEMORY
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞p. 54) or SIRIUS
channels as preset channels (☞p. 60). J1
PRESET j / i
Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞p. 56) or a SIRIUS preset channel
(☞p. 61). J1
FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h)
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM or AM (☞p. 54). J1
Selects a channel category for a SIRIUS (☞p. 60).
Front panel display
Displays information on this unit (☞p. 10).
TUNING/CH jj / ii
Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞p. 54) or SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels. J1
PURE DIRECT
Switches this unit to Pure Direct mode (☞p. 44).
d e f g
h
i
PRESET
CATEGORY
jk
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback
can also be heard through the headphones.
INPUT l / h
Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or
right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order.
SCENE
Switches the input source and the sound program with a single button
(☞p. 41). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch
on.
TONE CONTROL
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones
(☞p. 40).
PROGRAM l / h
Selects a sound program (☞p. 41). Press the left or right key
repeatedly to cycle through sound programs.
STRAIGHT
Changes a sound program to straight decoding mode (☞p. 42).
VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting game consoles to this unit temporarily (☞p. 29).
Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack
(☞p. 7).
VOLUME
Adjusts the volume level.
l
PURE DIRECT
YPAO MIC
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
FM
TUNING/CH
AM
VOLUME
SCENE
BD
DVD
PHONES
INPUT
TONE CONTROL
TV
CD
PROGRAM
RADIO
SILENT CINEMA
m
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
HDMI IN
n o p
q
r
VIDEO
s
L
AUDIO
R
t
J 1 : Usable when you have selected TUNER or SIRIUS input.
En
8
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Rear panel
e REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
a DOCK jack
f
b
c
d
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-12), iPod wireless receiver (YID-W10), or Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞p. 65, p. 68, p. 70).
HDMI OUT jack
For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video
signals (☞p. 23).
ANTENNA jacks
For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞p. 32).
MONITOR OUT jacks
VIDEO jack
COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks
g
h
i
For connecting a TV capable of receiving video
input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 23).
For connecting TV that are compatible with
component video signals, using three cables to
output video signal (☞p. 23).
a
b c
j
k
e
d
l AUDIO1-2 jacks
For connecting an external component that supports the remote
control function (☞p. 30).
HDMI1-5 jacks
For connecting external components equipped with HDMIcompatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 25).
SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers
(☞p. 17). Connect the presence speakers (☞p. 17) or the speakers for
Zone2 (☞p. 18) to the EXTRA SP jacks.
Power cable
For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet.
SIRIUS jack
For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) (☞p. 58).
AV1-6 jacks
For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video
outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 26).
AV OUT jacks
For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV36 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞p. 31).
f
g
SPEAKERS
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
FM
SIRIUS
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
HDMI 4
CENTER
HDMI 5
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
HDMI 3
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
IN
SINGLE
OUT
75
PB
EXTRA SP
PB
Y
o
p
q
Distinguishing the input and output jacks
The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked
in white to prevent connection errors. Use these jacks to
output audio/video signals to a TV or other external
component.
ZONE2/
PRESENCE
VIDEO
VIDEO
n
h
ARC
HDMI OUT
m
For connecting external components equipped with analog audio
outputs to input sound into this unit (☞p. 28).
TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting an external component that supports the trigger
function to operate it linked with operation of this unit (☞p. 31).
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output
(☞p. 29).
AUDIO OUT jacks
For outputting audio signals received when analog jacks, such as the
AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are selected (☞p. 31).
ZONE2 OUT jacks
Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a different
room. (☞p. 105).
PRE OUT terminals
For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external
power amplifier (☞p. 20, p. 30).
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
MONITOR OUT
SPEAKERS
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
CENTER
SINGLE
CENTER
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
CENTER
HDMI 5
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
SINGLE
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
75
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
PB
1 SUBWOOFER 2
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
i
j
k l
m n
op
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
SINGLE
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
CENTER
1 SUBWOOFER 2
q
Output jacks
En
9
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
i MUTE indicator
Front panel display
a HDMI indicator
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
■ Switching information on the front panel display
Flashes when audio is muted.
j VOLUME indicator
Lights up during normal HDMI communication when any of the
HDMI1-5 inputs are selected.
SIRIUS indicator
Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input source.
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP
technology is selected.
ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on
(☞p. 44).
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated (☞p. 43).
Tuner indicator
Light up according to the status of a received station (☞p. 54).
SLEEP indicator
Lights up when the sleep timer is on (☞p. 11).
ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when the audio output to Zone2 is enabled (☞p. 106).
a
b
SIRIUS
k
l
m
Displays the current volume level.
Cursor indicators
Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available
for operations.
Multi information display
Displays a range of information on menu items and settings.
Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
The front panel can display sound programs and surround
decoder names as well as the active input source.
Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source J2 →
sound program → surround decoder in order.
Input source name
MOVIE
VOL.
Standard
Subwoofer
Center speaker
SW
PL
PR
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR
Presence speaker L
Front speaker L
Surround speaker L
Surround back
speaker L
SW
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Sound program (DSP program)
Presence speaker R
Front speaker R
Surround speaker R
Surround back
speaker R
Surround back
speaker J1
c
d
e
f
ENHANCER
STEREO
3 TUNED
g hi
SLEEP
ZONE
2
j
VOL.
MUTE
SW
PL
PR
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR
k
l
k
m
J 1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only.
J 2 : During FM/AM reception, the frequency is displayed instead of the input source.
En
10
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
a Remote control signal transmitter
Remote control
Transmits infrared signals.
b MAIN/ZONE2
Switches the zone to be operated by the remote control between the
Main zone and Zone2 (☞p. 106).
a
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
b
c
HDMI
1
2
3
o
p
q
SOURCE RECEIVER
d
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
e
FM
AM
PRESET
f
INFO
MEMORY
g
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
TUNER
SIRIUS
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
h
j
BD
DVD
TV
CD
r
VOLUME
ENTER
k
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
RETURN
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
l
m
t
Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner
input.
FM
AM
(CATEGORY D / E)
MEMORY
PRESET F / G
TUN./CH H / I
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM.
Selects a channel category for a SIRIUS.
Presets radio stations.
Selects a preset station.
Changes tuning frequencies or SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels.
f INFO
HOLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
TV
n
s
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
HDMI1-5 jacks
Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks
AUDIO1-2 jacks
AV1-6 jacks
Changes the external component to operate with
the lExternal component operation keys
without changing inputs. J1
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
A Yamaha iPod universal dock, iPod wireless
receiver, or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
connected to the DOCK jack.
FM/AM tuner
A SIRIUS tuner connected to the SIRIUS jack.
e Radio control keys
SCENE
i
Select an input source on this unit from which to playback.
MULTI CH INPUT
DOCK
CATEGORY
ENT
Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name
of the currently selected input source, the sound program, the
surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.).
g Sound selection keys
Switch between the sound field effect (sound program) you are using
and the surround decoder (☞p. 41).
INPUT
TV VOL
Switches this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified
period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to
set the time for the sleep timer function.
Sleep 120min.
Sleep Off
Sleep 90min.
Sleep 30min.
Sleep 60min.
The SLEEP indicator lights up when the sleep timer is on.
d Input selector
HDMI1-5
V-AUX
AUDIO1-2
AV1-6
[A]
AV
TUNER
Switches an external component on and off.
4
AUDIO
5
c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power)
h SLEEP
i SCENE
Switch the input source and the sound program with a single button
(☞p. 41). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on.
j ON SCREEN
Turns on and off the ON SCREEN menu.
k Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN
Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when
menus, etc, are displayed.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen when menus are
displayed, or close the menu.
l External component operation keys
Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external
components (☞p. 96). J1
m Numeric keys
Enter numbers.
n TV control keys
Operate a monitor such as a TV.
o CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external component operations
(☞p. 97).
p RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power)
Switches this unit between on and standby mode.
q SOURCE/RECEIVER
Switches remote control key function to operate this unit or an
external component (☞p. 96). Operate an external component when
this key glows green, or this unit when this key glows orange.
r OPTION
Turns on and off the OPTION menu (☞p. 49).
s VOLUME +/Adjust the volume level (☞p. 40).
TV CH
MUTE
t MUTE
Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞p. 40).
J 1 : You can use lExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input
in advance if you want to operate external components (☞p. 97).
En
11
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
■ Displaying the following menus or viewing the current status of this unit on the
TV screen
On-screen display
When a TV is connected to this unit, the supplied remote control can be used to specify and verify this
unit’s settings via menus and options displayed on the TV screen.
• ON SCREEN menu
Press ON SCREEN to display the ON SCREEN menu.
• OPTION menu
Press OPTION to display the OPTION menu.
• Content window
Press Input selector to display the Content window.
The following displays are available in the on-screen display.
Content window
ON SCREEN menu
Detailed settings for this unit can be
configured. Use this menu to select desired
settings, change their values, or check the
current status of this unit.
Refer to “SETUP” (☞p. 72) for details.
Includes the Content browse view and the
Now playing view. The Now playing view
displays the status of the source from which
music is currently played back. Adjust
settings for music content from the Content
browse view.
Refer to “Confirming and operating input
sources from the Content window” (☞p. 53)
for details.
OPTION menu
Configure the optional settings for each input
source. Settings such as “Tone Control” and
“Volume Trim” are applied to this unit
regardless of the input source.
Refer to “Configuring settings specific to an
individual input source (OPTION menu)”
(☞p. 49) for details.
En
12
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and
connections in your listening environment.
Speaker channels and functions
■ Surround left and right speakers
■ Surround back left and right speakers
■ Front left and right speakers
The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1channel speakers providing rear-area sounds. When used with 6.1/
7.1-channel (including surround back channel), sound for right and
left rear-area is output.
Outputs the rear effect. When used with 6.1ch sound, sound from
the left and right sound surround back speakers is mixed and output
from a single speaker. When used with 5.1ch sound, sound from
surround back speakers is distributed between the left and right
surround speakers.
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo
sound) and effect sounds.
Ex.
Ex.
Front speaker layout:
Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening
position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen,
the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the
screen from the bottom.
■ Center speaker
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals,
etc.).
Ex.
Center speaker layout:
Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When
using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of
the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned.
When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen.
Surround speaker layout:
Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides
facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60
degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the
speaker tops at a height of 4.9 – 5.9 ft. (1.5 – 1.8 m) from the floor.
■ Presence left and right speakers
The presence speakers are used for front effect sounds. When used
in combination with the sound programs (☞p. 41), a sound with a
richer and more spatial presence is possible.
Ex.
Surround back speaker layout:
When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers
towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position.
Arrange the left and right speakers at least 1 ft. (30 cm) apart. The
same separation as with the front left and right speakers is
optimum.
When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the
listening position.
■ Subwoofer
The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency
effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a
subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier.
Ex.
Presence speaker layout:
Place the left and right presence speakers 1.6 – 3.3 ft. (0.5 – 1 m) to
the outside of the left and right front speakers respectively. The
tops of the presence speakers should be 5.9 ft. (1.8 m) above the
floor.
Ex.
Subwoofer speaker layout:
Place it to the outside of the front left and right speakers facing
slightly inward to reduce echoes from the wall.
En
13
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Speaker layout
■ Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout
(7 speakers + subwoofer)
Front speaker R
Subwoofer
Front speaker L
Surround
speaker R
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
■ Connections of speakers
A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the
speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the
appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker
configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the
default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞p. 84).
Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the
speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back
speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker
connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17).
Power Amp Assign
■ Adding the presence speakers for a richer
sound field effect
■ Presence speaker layout
(7 speakers + subwoofer + presence speakers)
Front speaker R
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Surround back speaker L
12 in (30 cm)
or more
Speaker jacks
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER
EXTRA SP jack
Presence L/R speakers
7ch Normal (Default)
Front
speaker L
Presence
speaker L
Presence speaker R
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the
speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the
appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker
configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the
default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞p. 84).
Subwoofer
Surround
speaker R
Surround back speaker R
Audio from a 7.1-channel audio source can be played back with
no degradation with this speaker configuration.
Power Amp Assign
7ch Normal (Default)
Continues to the
next page
■ Connections of speakers
Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the
speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back
speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker
connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17).
Speaker jacks
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER
EXTRA SP jack
No used
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Surround back speaker L
12 in (30 cm)
or more
Surround back speaker R
This unit automatically selects the presence speakers or
surround back speakers to output sounds according to the
selected sound program.
When the sound program is changed, the speakers that output
the sound are switched between the presence speakers and
surround back speakers automatically.
En
14
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■ Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source
without surround back speakers
■ 5.1-channel speaker layout
(5 speakers + subwoofer)
Front speaker R
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
■ Connections of speakers
A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the
speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the
appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker
configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the
default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞p. 84).
Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the
speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back
speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Bi-amp connection” for
details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17, p. 18).
Subwoofer
Front speaker L
Power Amp Assign
Surround
speaker R
■ Using the front speakers that support bi-
amp connections for a high quality sound
■ 5-channel speaker layout
(Front speakers (Bi-amp) + 3 speakers)
Front speaker R
(Bi-amp connection)
Center speaker
Front speaker L
(Bi-amp connection)
This unit can mix 7.1-channel audio source down to 5.1-channel
sound. This enables 7.1-channel sound without surround back
speakers.
Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the
speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back
speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker
connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17).
Speaker jacks
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SUBWOOFER
EXTRA SP jack
No used
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER
EXTRA SP jack
No used
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Use the “Power Amp Assign” function which can easily apply the
appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker
configuration (☞p. 84).
Power Amp Assign
Subwoofer
Surround
speaker R
Surround speaker L
■ Connections of speakers
Speaker jacks
7ch Normal (Default)
5ch BI-AMP
Continues to the
next page
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Using the front speakers that support bi-amp connections
reproduces a high quality sound.
En
15
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■ Using speakers in two rooms (Zone2
function)
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout + Zone2
(7 speakers (in main zone) + subwoofer (in main
zone) + front speakers (in secondary zone))
In addition to the main room, speakers in another room can also
be controlled.
When the built-in amplifier for the speakers in another room is
turned on, the speakers that output the sound are switched from
the surround back speakers to the speakers in another room
automatically. J1
Main zone
■ Connections of speakers
Front speaker R
Front speaker L
Subwoofer
Surround
speaker R
Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the
speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back
speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Multi-zone audio system
using the internal amplifier of this unit” for details on connecting
speakers (☞p. 17, p. 18).
Speaker jacks
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER
EXTRA SP jack
Zone2 speakers
Center speaker
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Surround speaker L
Surround back speaker L
12 in (30 cm) or
more
Surround back speaker R
Use the “Power Amp Assign” function which can easily apply the
appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker
configuration (☞p. 84).
Power Amp Assign
Zone2
7ch + 1ZONE
Front
speaker R
Front speaker L
J 1 : Sound cannot be output from both the surround back speakers and the speakers
in the second zone at the same time.
En
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Connecting speakers and subwoofer
Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel.
CAUTION
• Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers.
• Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+”
(positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “–” (negative, black) terminal.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP
WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on.
■ Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and
Subwoofer connection
Front speaker
R
Surround
speaker
L
R
Surround back
speaker
L
R
■ Presence speaker connection
When using the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the
EXTRA SP jacks as shown in the diagram below.
Presence
speaker R
L
The presence speakers (PL/PR) that output front effect sounds can
be connected to this unit. With the sound programs (☞p. 45),
sound with a richer and more spatial presence can be created.
Presence
speaker L
1.8 m
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
FRONT
CENTER
HDMI 5
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP
MOTE
ZONE2/
PRESENCE
SINGLE
+12V
0.1A MAX.
0.5 – 1 m
0.5 – 1 m
PL
PR
FL
FR
1.8 m
• Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full
advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP sound programs.
• Although you can connect both surround back speakers and
presence speakers to this unit, you cannot output sounds from
those speakers at the same time.
GER OUT
CENTER
ND
SUR.BACK
TI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
SINGLE
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
CENTER
1
Continues to the
next page
OOFER 2
SPEAKERS
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
HDMI 4
CENTER
HDMI 5
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
HDMI 3
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SIRIUS
PR
IN
SINGLE
OUT
75
PB
EXTRA SP
PB
ZONE2/
PRESENCE
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
Center speaker
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
SINGLE
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
CENTER
1 SUBWOOFER 2
Subwoofer
En
17
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■ Bi-amp connection
This unit can be connected to speakers that support bi-amp
connections. When connecting speakers, connect the FRONT jacks
and the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks as in the diagram
below. Configure the bi-amp settings to activate connections.
■ Changing speaker impedance
■ Multi-zone audio system using the internal
amplifier of this unit
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP jacks as
in the diagram below.
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/
PRESENCE
Zone2
FRONT
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
HDMI 4
CENTER
HDMI 5
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
HDMI 3
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SIRIUS
PR
IN
SINGLE
OUT
75
PB
SINGLE
EXTRA SP
PB
ZONE2/
PRESENCE
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding
STRAIGHT on the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on
the front panel display.
After approximately a few seconds, the top menu item is
displayed. J1
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
COAXIAL
1
2
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
OPTICAL
This unit is configured for 8 Ω speakers at the factory setting.
When connecting to 6 Ω speakers, carry out the following
procedure to switch to 6 Ω. When this unit is configured for 6 Ω
speakers, 4 Ω speakers can also be used as the front speakers.
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
SINGLE
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
CENTER
1 SUBWOOFER 2
MAIN ZONE A
CAUTION
NOTES
• Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any
brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to
the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making
bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• If connecting a bi-amp, then surround back speakers cannot be
used.
The EXTRA SP jacks of this unit should not be connected to a
Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker
per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple
speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance
load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for
correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all
channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found
on the back panel of this unit.
MAIN ZONE
YPAO MIC
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
SCENE
BD
DVD
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
INPUT
TONE CONTROL
TV
CD
PROGRAM
RADIO
STRAIGHT
H
STRAIGHT
Continues to the
next page
J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed
(Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 99) for details on the Advanced Setup menu.
En
18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front panel.
SPIMP.-8MIN
4
5
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.”
■ Connecting speakers
This type of jack can connect to the following speakers or
connection.
•
•
•
•
•
Front L/R speakers
Center speaker
Surround L/R speakers
Surround back L/R speakers
Bi-amp connection (Front speaker L/R speakers)
4
Tighten the terminal.
Connecting the banana plug
Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of
the terminal.
FR
ON
T
Banana plug
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
switch it on again.
The power turns on, when the settings you made has been
configured.
2
3
FR
ON
T
1
4
1
Remove approximately 0.4 in. (10 mm) of insulation
from the ends of the speaker cables, and twist the
bare wires of the cables together firmly so that they
will not cause short circuits.
2
3
Loosen the speaker terminals.
Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap
on the side of the terminal.
En
19
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■ Connecting extra speakers
■ Connecting the subwoofer
The EXTRA SP jacks can connect to the following speakers.
• Presence L/R speakers
• Zone2 speakers
Red: positive (+)
EX
ZO
PR
1
2
Black: negative (–)
Press down the tab and insert the bare end of the
speaker cable into the hole in the terminal.
1
Connect the subwoofer input jack to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or 2 jack on this unit with an audio
pin cable.
2
Set the subwoofer volume as follows.
Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than
half).
Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum.
Release the tab to secure the wire.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer examples
NOTE
After connection, applying this setting to this unit is required to
activate all speaker connections. With using “Power Amp
Assign” function, you can easily apply the speaker
configuration.
Refer to “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 84) for details on using
“Power Amp Assign” function.
En
20
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Cable plugs and jacks
VIDEO jacks
This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for
components that you are going to connect.
These jacks transmit conventional analog video
signals.
Use video pin cables.
■ Audio/Video jacks
Video pin cable
HDMI jacks
Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack.
Only use an HDMI cable.
HDMI cable
■ Audio jacks
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
• We recommend using a cable less than 16.4 ft. (5.0 m) long to prevent signal quality degradation.
• When a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio
output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞p. 104).
• When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be
played back.
• If you connect this unit to a component that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is required.
■ Analog video jacks
OPTICAL jacks
COAXIAL jacks
These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals.
Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio
signals.
These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals.
Use pin cables for digital audio signals.
Digital audio fiber-optic cable
Digital audio pin cable
AUDIO jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
The signal is separated into three components:
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR).
Use component video pin cables with three plugs.
Component video pin cable
These jacks transmit conventional analog audio
signals.
Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to
the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L
jack.
Stereo pin cable
En
21
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting a TV monitor
When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV
This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV.
HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input
signal format supported by your TV.
Connect to the TV using the same type of connection that you used to connect to the external
component, and change the inputs on your TV to match that of the external component you are using
for playback. If the external component and TV are equipped with different types of analog video
jacks, this unit will convert the video signal to component video signal, or vice-versa, according to the
type of video input jacks used by the TV. J2, J3
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI OUT jack (MONITOR OUT)
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
FM
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SIRIUS
Output
HDMI
HDM
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
Input
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
TV
Component
video input
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
Video input
VIDEO jack
(MONITOR OUT)
Through
Converted
When connecting to an HDMI compatible TV
Video signal such as component video and video received by this unit is converted to HDMI and output to
the TV. Just select HDMI input on the TV to view video from any external source connected to this unit. J1
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI
TV
HDMI input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
Through
Converted
J 1 : You can change the resolution and aspect ratio when converting to HDMI to suit your requirements (☞p. 90).
J 2 : Set “Analog to Analog Conversion” to “On” (☞p. 89).
J 3 : Analog to analog conversion is available only for 480i/576i-resolution video signal.
En
22
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Connecting an HDMI video monitor
■ Connecting a component video monitor J1
Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack.
Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks.
Component video input
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ARC
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
FM
SIRIUS
DOCK
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
HDMI input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
FM
SIRIUS
IN
PR
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
RE
GND AM
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
PR
PB
IN
HDMI
OUT
75
PB
PB
75
PB
Y
PB
PB
HDMI
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
Y
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
Y
Y
OR OUT
TRIG
TRIG
TV
TV
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MUL
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
• We recommend using a cable less than 16.4 ft. (5.0 m) long to prevent signal quality degradation.
• When a TV that supports the HDMI function and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio
output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞p. 104).
• When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be
played back.
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
SURROU
MUL
AUDIO 2
■ Connecting a video monitor J1
Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
SIRIUS
Video input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
VIDEO
OUT
75
PB
PB
V
VIDEO
Y
Y
MONITO
TRIG
TV
V
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MUL
J 1 : When connecting to a TV that supports HDMI input, the video signal for the COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO jacks is
converted and output from HDMI OUT jack. When connecting to a TV via the HDMI jack, you do not need to use these
jacks.
En
23
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Listening to TV audio
To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV:
When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI
Control function
When your TV supports both HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return
Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the
unit are possible using a single HDMI cable.
The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that
makes TV sound control easier to use.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return
Channel function” (☞p. 104).
When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions
When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI
Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match
operations carried out on the TV.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically
when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 103).
When using other TVs
To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio
output jacks.
TV audio output
Connection
Optical digital audio output
Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a fiber-optic cable.
Coaxial digital audio output
Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a digital audio pin
cable.
Analog stereo output
Connect to one of the AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2 with a stereo pin
cable.
Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound.
If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output
to the receiver’s AV4 jack.
Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation
using the SCENE function (☞p. 41).
Available input jacks
Audio output
(Optical, coaxial, or analog)
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
AUDIO
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
FM
SIRIUS
COMPONENT
VIDEO
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIG
TV
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV
OUT
FRONT
SURRO
MUL
You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control
code (☞p. 97).
En
24
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Connecting external components
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on
the playback devices such as BD/DVD players.
AUDIO
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
Input jack
Video input
Audio input
HDMI1
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI2
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI3
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI4
HDMI
HDMI
■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals
from a jack other than HDMI
This unit can use the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from
other input jacks.
For example, if a playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack,
use the following method to change the audio input.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
j
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
HDMI5
HDMI
HDMI
AV1
Component video
Optical digital
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
SIRIUS
HDMI
k
PR
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV3
Video
Coaxial digital
AV4
Video
Optical digital
AV5
Video
Analog (Stereo)
AV6
Video
Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO1
—
Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO2
—
Analog (Stereo)
VIDEO AUX
HDMI/Video
HDMI/Analog (Stereo)
OPTICAL
ARC
(BD/DVD)
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
HDMI
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
HDMI
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
HDMI
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWO
MULTI CH INPUT
BD/DVD player
HDMI
FM
TRIGGER OUT
O
Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-5 jacks. The HDMI IN
jack on the front panel can also be used.
Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-5 or VIDEO AUX) that the playback device is
connected to for playback.
HDMI output
MONITOR OUT
O
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with
COMPONENT
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
CENT
Coaxial digital
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
75
PB
Y
Component video
HDMI OUT
REMOTE
PR
HDMI
AV2
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
HDMI
GND AM
OPTICAL
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ARC
HDMI/Audio (Optical)
output
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press jON SCREEN to display the ON SCREEN menu.
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Input,” and then press
kENTER. J1
Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select the desired HDMI input
source, and then press kCursor B.
Press kCursor C repeatedly to select “Audio In,” and then press
kENTER.
Press kCursor B / C to select the audio input source.
Once you have completed the setup, press jON SCREEN to close
the menu.
CENTER
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
J 1 : Refer to the “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞p. 72) for details on selecting the input source.
BD/DVD player
En
25
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component
video cables
Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks.
■ Component connections to analog audio output devices
Component video / Audio
output
Using optical digital audio output sources
Select the AV1 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ARC
PR
PB
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
Component video / Audio (Optical)
output
FM
Y
SIRIUSR
P
PR
PB
PB
Y
Y
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
OUT
AUDIO
ARC
75
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
ANTENNA
FM
SIRIUSR
P
PR
PB
PB
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
HDMI 1
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
CENT
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
L
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
L
RE
GND AM
PR
IN
R
PB
OUT
75
Y
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWO
MULTI CH INPUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
OPTICAL
PB
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
TRIG
Game console
O
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
FRONT
AV
OUT
AV 6
AUDIO 1
SURROU
MUL
AUDIO 2
BD/DVD player
Using coaxial digital audio output sources
Select the AV2 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
The video input from the AV1-2 jacks can be used in combination with the audio input from other
AV inputs or AUDIO1-2.
When connecting these devices, select the AV input jacks or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input
for AV1 or AV2. Refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a
jack other than HDMI” (☞p. 25) for detailed setup guidance.
For playback of the connected device, select the AV input source (AV1-2) to which the device is
connected with the component video cable.
Component video / Audio (Coaxial)
output
ARC
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
PR
FM
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SIRIUS
PR
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
PB
PB
Y
Y
Y
75
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
COAXIAL
TRIG
C
C
OPTICAL
AV 1
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MUL
BD/DVD player
En
26
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables
Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-6 input jacks.
Using analog stereo audio output sources
Select the AV5 or AV6 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
Using optical digital audio output sources
Select the AV4 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
ARC
Video / Audio
output
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
RE
GND AM
PR
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SIRIUS
V
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
Video / Audio (Optical)
output
SIRIUS
VIDEO
ARC
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
AUDIO
V
Y
Y
IN
MONITOR OUT
TRIG
L
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
V
Y
R
VIDEO
VIDEO
V
L
PB
R
Y
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
TRIG
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MUL
O
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL
AV
OUT
(CD)
AV 5
AV 6
FRONT
AUDIO 1
SURROU
MUL
AUDIO 2
BD/DVD player
BD/DVD player
Using coaxial digital audio output sources
Select the AV3 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
ARC
Video / Audio (Coaxial)
output
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
SIRIUS
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
V
V
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIG
COAXIAL
C
C
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MUL
BD/DVD player
En
27
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Connecting CD players and other audio devices
Using coaxial digital output sources
Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) to which the playback device is connected for playback.
Using analog stereo output sources
Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) to which the playback device is connected for playback.
ARC
FM
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
HDMI 1
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
FM
SIRIUS
PR
PR
IN
OUT
RE
GND AM
PR
IN
Audio (Coaxial) output
OUT
75
PB
RE
GND AM
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
PB
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Audio output
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
ARC
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
Y
Y
L
MONITOR OUT
TRIG
C
COAXIAL
C
TRIG
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 1
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MUL
R
OPTICAL
AV 1
COAXIAL
AV 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
FRONT
AV
OUT
SURROU
MUL
CD player
CD player
We recommend connecting audio devices with a coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital
jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD”
SCENE key (☞p. 41).
Using optical digital output sources
Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) to which the playback device is connected for playback.
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
SIRIUS
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
Audio (Optical) output
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
TRIG
O
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL
(CD)
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MUL
CD player
En
28
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting game consoles
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a game console to
the receiver.
Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices.
■ When connecting an HDMI compatible device
Connect the HDMI output of the device to the HDMI IN jack of this unit.
VOLUME
RADIO
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
HDMI IN
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
• Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices.
• When both the HDMI connection and the analog video/audio connection are performed between the
HDMI compatible device and this unit, only the HDMI signal will be input.
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
This unit has 8 sets of input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SUR. BACK and
SUBWOOFER) to input multi-channel analog sound signals. If your playback component, such as a
DVD player or SACD player, has multi-channel analog output capability, you can enjoy up to 7.1channel multi-channel sound. To output multi-channel sound, connect the audio output jacks of your
playback component to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit, and set the input source of this unit to
“MULTI CH.”
R
CENTER
HDMI
HDMI output
HDMI
HDMI
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
Game console
L
R
L
R
L
R
■ When connecting an non-HDMI compatible device
Connect the video and audio outputs of the device to the VIDEO and AUDIO jacks of this unit.
L
V
L
AUDIO
R
Center out
VIDEO
Subwoofer out
HDMI IN
Front out
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
Surround out
RADIO
Surround back out
VOLUME
R
Video output
VIDEO
V
AUDIO
L
Analog audio output
Multi-format player/External decoder
(7.1-channel output)
R
Game console
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor and tone control are
automatically disabled.
• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for
missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature.
• When the input source is switched to “MULTI CH,” images input from a component connected to the
HDMI1-5, AV1-6, or VIDEO AUX jacks can be displayed on a video monitor (☞p. 75). If your DVD
player does not support multi-channel digital output, connect it to these input jacks.
En
29
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting an external amplifier
Connecting a SCENE link playback-compatible device
The same channel signals are output from the jacks of the PRE OUT terminals as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main
amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input terminals of the power amplifier to the PRE
OUT terminals of this unit.
When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the
remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input
and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
NOTE
Remote control out
When a component is connected to the PRE OUT terminals, do not connect speakers to the
SPEAKERS terminals corresponding to those PRE OUT terminals.
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
HDMI 3
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Infrared signal receiver or
Yamaha component
GND AM
PR
IN
OUT
75
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/
PRESENCE
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
COAXIAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
Remote control in
CENTER
OPTICAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
Yamaha component
(CD or DVD player, etc.)
1 SUBWOOFER 2
abc d
e
a FRONT (PRE OUT) jacks
Front channel output jacks.
• When a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE link playback function is connected via the
REMOTE OUT jack, playback begins automatically when the SCENE function is used (☞p. 41).
• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not a Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the
SCENE menu to “Off” (☞p. 77).
b SURROUND (PRE OUT) jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
c SUR. BACK (PRE OUT) jacks
Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel,
connect it to the SUR. BACK (SINGLE) jack.
d SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) 1/2 jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is
output from them.
e CENTER (PRE OUT) jack
Center channel output jack.
En
30
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Using the Trigger function to link external component power
Connecting audio/video recording devices
When this unit is connected to a Yamaha subwoofer that supports the system connection or the
component with TRIGGER IN jack, you can turn on and off the component by using this unit.
This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external components
through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to
VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external components.
■ When connecting a Yamaha subwoofer
Video / Audio
input
System connection input
VIDEO
V
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
HDMI 3
AUDIO
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
L
IN
OUT
75
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
Y
R
ARC
PB
VIDEO
FM
CENTER
SIRIUS
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
HDMI 3
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO 2
V
Y
AUDIO
OUT
MONITOR OUT
Yamaha subwoofer
that supports the system
connection
VCR
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
R
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
Audio input
L
L
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
■ When connecting a component with the TRIGGER IN jack
AUDIO
L
R
Trigger input
ARC
TRIGGER IN
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
FM
Using the AV OUT jacks
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
Connect this jacks to the external component’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks.
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Using the AUDIO OUT jacks
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
MONITOR OUT
CENTER
COAXIAL
Audio recorder
HDMI 3
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
Component with the
TRIGGER IN jack
(Power amplifier or
DVD player, etc.)
Connect this jack to the external component’s analog audio input jacks.
HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted
from these jacks.
Functions of the TRIGGER OUT jack can be specified (☞p. 94).
En
31
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas
properly to their respective jacks.
AM loop antenna
Position the AM antenna away from the
receiver. The wires of the AM antenna have
no polarity.
You can connect either wire to the AM jack
or the GND jack.
Indoor FM antenna
ARC
■ Improving AM reception
Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 16.4 – 32.8 ft. (5 – 10 m) vinyl-coated wire. Make
sure the AM loop antenna is still connected.
Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper
plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground.
The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet.
HDMI 1
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
SIRIUS
We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized
dealer.
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
■ Improving FM reception
PR
GND AM
PR
O
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
Connecting the AM loop antenna
Press and hold
Insert
Release
Assembling the AM loop antenna
En
32
CONNECTIONS
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
This unit is equipped with a Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using
YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room in which this unit is placed). J1
When using YPAO, a test tone will be output from the speakers
for approximately 3 minutes to measure acoustics. Be aware of
the following when using YPAO.
• The test tone is output at high volume. Refrain from using this
function at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
• Take care that the test tone does not frighten small children.
YPAO operations can be viewed on the front panel display or
TV screen.
1
Check the following before using YPAO.
2
Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in
your listening position.
Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards.
This unit
• The headphones are removed.
YPAO microphone
TV
• This unit is connected to the TV correctly.
• The power is turned on.
• The video input to which the video output from this unit has been
selected.
Subwoofer
• The power is turned on.
• Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if
present) is set to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use
equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod)
as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod
screws to fix the microphone in place.
MAX
Subwoofer examples
3
Switch this unit on.
Continues to the
next page
J 1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they
are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance.
En
33
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Display during measurement
SOURCE RECEIVER
4
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO
MIC jack on the front panel.
2
• It takes approximately 3 minutes to accurately
measure acoustics. Keep the room as quiet as possible
while acoustics are measured.
• Wait in a corner of the room, or leave it entirely, while
acoustics are measured to avoid creating an
obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO
microphone.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
MAIN ZONE
TUNER
YPAO MIC
CATEGORY
FM
ZONE2
ZON
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
This completes preparation. To achieve more accurate
results, take note of the following when measuring
acoustics.
YPAO
VOL.
Progress 0%
SW
PL
PR
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k
“Mic On. View ON SCREEN” appears on the front
panel display, and the following display appears on the
front panel display or TV screen.
MUTE
YPAO
REC
ENTER to Start
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
VOL.
PL
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
PR
R
SR
SBR
5
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
the “Measure” and press kENTER to start
measurement.
Auto measurement starts in 10 seconds.
• To start the measurement immediately, press
kENTER again.
• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the
previous screen, press kRETURN and then
kENTER.
The following display appears when measurement
finishes without any problems.
YPAO
VOL.
Save/Exit
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
k RETURN
Continues to the
next page
En
34
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
Result
Displays the results of automatic
acoustics measurement. Refer to
“Reviewing and reloading automatic
setup parameters” for details (☞p. 36).
Save/Exit
Applies the result to the speaker setup and
finishes the automatic measurement.
4
AUDIO
AV
1
2
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
DOCK
7
Press kCursor D / E to select “SAVE” and
press kENTER.
YPAO
VOL.
Disconnect Mic
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
NOTE
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
If a problem occurs, an error message or report is
displayed either during or after acoustic measurement.
Refer to “When an error message is displayed during
measurement” (☞p. 37), or “When a warning
message is displayed after measurement” (☞p. 37) to
resolve the problem and measure acoustics with
YPAO again.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
6
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
Press kCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit”
and press kENTER.
YPAO
Select:Save
VOL.
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
8
Press kENTER.
YPAO is automatically terminated. Disconnect the
YPAO microphone.
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you
have finished measuring, store the microphone out of
direct sunlight, and away from locations that may
experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV
equipment.
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
En
35
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Reviewing and reloading automatic
SOURCE RECEIVER
setup parameters
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
The results of automatic acoustics measurement can be
reviewed once measurement is complete. Automatic
setup parameters can also be reloaded if you are not
satisfied with manually configured speaker setup and
sound adjustments.
AUDIO
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
2
Select the desired menu item (or enable a
function) using kCursor B / C / D / E and
kENTER.
3
Press kRETURN to finish “Result” menu.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
NOTE
TUN./CH
When automatic setup parameters are reloaded,
manually configured settings are cleared. To save
manually configured settings before reloading
automatic setup parameters, see “Prohibiting setting
changes” (☞p. 94).
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
k
1
Wiring
Displays the polarity of each connected
speaker.
• “Normal” is displayed when the
polarity of the connected speaker is
normal.
Size
Displays the size of the connected
speakers.
• “Large” is displayed when the
connected speaker has the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals
effectively.
• “Small” is displayed when the
connected speaker does not have the
ability to reproduce the low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance
Displays the distance from the listening
position to speakers. The unit for distance
can be switched between “ft” (feet) and
“m” (meter) by pressing kCursor D / E.
Level
Displays the result of the adjustment of
each connected speaker output level.
Setup Reload
Applies “Result” menu settings to this
unit.
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Result” and press kENTER immediately
after the automatic measurement.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
The “Result” menu can also be viewed from the
display shown after the YPAO microphone is
connected.
ENT
The results of acoustics measurement are displayed.
INPUT
MUTE
b
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
a
c
The type of parametric equalizer can also be selected
from “PEQ Select” (☞p. 87).
a List of menu items
Menu items available in the Result menu are displayed.
b Diagram
Shows the speaker setup and sound adjustment as diagram.
c Message
Displays warning or error messages.
En
36
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ When an error message is
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
V-AUX
AV
1
displayed during measurement
See “Error messages” (☞p. 38) for instructions on
resolving the problem and measure acoustics again.
3
4
Press kCursor E to select “RETRY.”
NOTE
Press kENTER to use YPAO again.
Although the results of acoustics measurement can be
applied when a warning message is displayed, optimal
sound will not be achieved. Resolving the problem
and using YPAO to measure acoustics again is
recommended.
When “E-10” is displayed
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Check the error code displayed and use YPAO to
measure acoustics again as described below.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
displayed
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-3,” “E-4” or “E-6” is
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
1
2
3
4
5
Press kENTER.
Press kCursor E to select “EXIT.”
1
2
3
4
5
Press kENTER.
Press kCursor E to select “EXIT.”
Press kENTER to terminate YPAO.
Switch the unit to standby mode.
Turn on the unit and use YPAO again.
To exit YPAO with some options
1
2
Use kCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit”
and press kENTER.
Use kCursor D / E to select one of the
following options and press kENTER.
SAVE:
Exits YPAO applying the results of measurement.
CANCEL:
Returns to the previous screen (warning message
screen).
EXIT:
Exits YPAO without saving the results.
■ When a warning message is
Press kENTER to terminate YPAO, and
switch the unit to standby mode.
Check that the speakers are properly
connected.
displayed after measurement
See “Warning messages” (☞p. 39) for instructions on
resolving the problem. The speaker causing the problem
can be confirmed from the TV screen display.
Turn on the unit and use YPAO again.
When “E-5,” “E-7,” “E-8” or “E-9” is displayed
1
2
Press kENTER.
Check that the environment is suitable for
accurate measurement.
En
37
CONNECTIONS
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
■ Message list
■ Error messages
NOTE
If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have
occurred and carry out the measurement process again.
■ When a warning message is displayed before
measurement
Connect MIC!
The YPAO microphone is
not connected.
Connect the YPAO
microphone to the YPAO
MIC jack on the front
panel.
Unplug HP!
The headphones are
connected.
Remove the headphones.
Memory Guard!
The settings of this unit
are protected.
Set “Memory Guard” in
the Setup menu to “Off”
(☞p. 94).
E-1:
No Front SP
E-2:
No Sur. SP
The unit was not able to
find the front channel.
Check that the left and
right front speakers are
connected correctly.
The unit was only able to
find one of side of the
surround channels.
Check that the left and
right surround speakers
are connected correctly.
The unit was only able to
find one of side of the
presence channels.
Check that the left and
right presence speakers
are connected correctly.
E-4:
SBR→SBL
Only one surround back
speaker is connected and
only the right side
surround back channel
sound is detected.
When only one surround
back speaker is
connected, connect to the
left side (SINGLE)
terminal.
E-5:
Noisy
The noise is too loud,
preventing accurate
measurements from
being taken.
Measure again in quiet
surroundings. Turn off any
devices in the room that
may be emitting noise, or
place them further away
from the YPAO
microphone.
When this message is
displayed, selecting
“PROCEED” will allow
you to continue measuring.
However, we recommend
resolving the problem and
measuring again, as
continuing measurement
without doing so will not
give accurate results.
E-3:
No F.PRNS SP
E-6:
Check Sur.
Even though surround
left and right speakers are
not connected, only the
surround back speakers
are connected.
E-7:
No MIC
The YPAO microphone
has been removed.
While measuring, take
care not to touch the
YPAO microphone.
E-8:
No Signal
The YPAO microphone
could not distinguish a
test tone.
Check that the YPAO
microphone has been
installed correctly.
Check that each speaker
has been connected and
installed correctly.
The YPAO microphone
or the YPAO MIC jack
may be broken. Inquire at
the retailer where you
purchased this unit, or the
nearest Yamaha service
center.
E-9:
User Cancel
You have carried out an
operation that has
cancelled the measuring
process.
Carry out the measuring
process again. Do not
operate this unit by, for
example, adjusting the
volume.
E-10:
Internal Error
An internal error has
occurred.
Carry out the measuring
process again. Contact a
Yamaha service center if
“E-10” is displayed
again.
When using surround back
speakers, connection of the
surround left/right
speakers is necessary.
En
38
CONNECTIONS
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
■ Warning messages
W-1:
Out of Phase
The speakers displayed
are connected with the
opposite polarity.
Depending on the type of
speakers you are using
and the environment in
which you have them
installed, this message
may occur even if the
speakers are connected
correctly.
Depending on the type of
speakers, “W-1” may
display even if the
speakers are connected
correctly.
W-2:
Over 24m/80ft
The speakers displayed
are separated from the
listening position by
more than 24 m, and
cannot be adjusted
correctly.
Install the speakers with
24 m of the listening
point.
W-3:
Level Error
Volume level varies
greatly for individual
channels, and cannot be
adjusted correctly.
Check that all speakers
are installed in the same
surroundings.
Check that the speaker
polarity + (positive), and
- (negative) are correct. If
these are connected
correctly, you can use the
speakers normally even
this message appears.
Check that the speaker
polarity + (positive), and
- (negative) are correct.
We recommend the same
speakers or speakers with
as similar specifications
as possible.
Adjust the volume of the
subwoofer.
If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results,
but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you
resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process
again.
En
39
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Basic playback procedure
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
d
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
1
2
Turn on external components (TV, DVD
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
Use the dInput selector to select the input
source.
The name of the selected input source is displayed for
a few seconds. J1
TUN./CH
Adjusting high/low-frequency sound
(Tone control)
You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range
(Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds
output from the front left and right speakers to obtain
desired tone.
2
Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output
level in those frequency ranges.
Adjustable range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
When DOCK, TUNER, or SIRIUS is selected, the
Content window is displayed (☞p. 53).
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
VOLUME
s
MUTE
t
3
Play the external component that you have
selected as the source input, or select a
radio station on the tuner.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the
external component for details on playback.
The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be
set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the
headphones connected.
1
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
The display returns to the previous display soon after
you release the key.
• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not
match those from other channels well.
• The tone control can also be adjusted in the OPTION
menu (☞p. 50).
TONE CONTROL
REC
For details on the following operations, refer to the
corresponding pages:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
MAIN ZONE
YPAO MIC
• “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 54)
• “Listening to Satellite Radio” (☞p. 58)
• “Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™”
(☞p. 65)
• “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components”
(☞p. 70)
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d Input selector
s VOLUME +/t MUTE
4
Press sVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume.
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
SCENE
BD
DVD
PHONES
INPUT
TONE CONTROL
TV
CD
RADIO
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
PROGRAM l / h
The current setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
To mute the output.
Press tMUTE to mute the audio output.
Press tMUTE again to unmute.
TONE
Treble
VOL.
+0.5dB
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
J 1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front
panel display as necessary (☞p. 73).
En
40
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources and sound programs with one key.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
V-AUX
AV
1
Four scenes are available for different uses, such as
d playing movies or music. The following input sources
and sound programs are provided as the initial factory
settings.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
SCENE
Input
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Sound
program
g
i
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
mode
BD/DVD
HDMI1
Drama
Off
TV
AV4
STRAIGHT
On
CD
AV3
STRAIGHT
Off
RADIO
TUNER
STRAIGHT
On
Registering input sources/sound
program
1
2
Use dInput selector to select the input
source you want to register.
Use the gSound selection keys to select
the sound program or Compressed Music
Enhancer mode you want to register.
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Press the iSCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front panel
display.
SCENE1
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SET Complete
Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed
• When changing “SCENE,” also change the external
component that the remote control operates (☞p. 96).
• Selecting a scene and editing the scene function are
also available in the SCENE menu (☞p. 76).
OPTION
ON SCREEN
3
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
Enjoying the desired sound field effect
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. Multi-channel playback from almost any audio source can be enjoyed using a variety
of sound decoders and various sound field effect programs stored on the chip. Sound field effect programs built into this unit are called “sound programs.”
INPUT
MUTE
d Input selector
g Sound selection keys
i SCENE
Selecting sound programs and
sound decoders
This unit offers sound programs in many different
categories suitable for movies, music and other uses.
Choose a sound program that sounds best with the
source you are playing back, rather than relying on the
name or explanation of the program.
• Sound programs are stored for each input source.
When you change the input source, the sound program
previously selected for that input source is applied
again.
• When you playback DTS Express sources or audio
signals with sampling frequency of higher than
96 kHz, the straight decoding mode (☞p. 42) is
automatically selected.
• When you playback DTS-HD sources with CINEMA
DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.
Continues to the
next page
En
41
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Enjoying the desired sound field effect
ZONE 2
CODE SET
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
CATEGORY
FM
Press gMUSIC repeatedly
Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback
sound without sound field processing. You can playback
as follows in straight decoding mode.
Selecting surround decoder:
2-channel sources such as CD
Select “2ch Stereo” from the sound programs when you
want to playback 2-channel stereo sound (from the front
speakers only), regardless of the playback source.
Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the
playback of CD and BD/DVD sources.
Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly
Stereo sound plays through the front left and right
speakers.
2-channel sources such as CD
Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/
DVD
Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD
(Straight decoding mode)
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
■ Enjoying stereo playback
MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly
MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly
Selecting stereo reproduction:
AV
TUNER
■ Enjoying unprocessed playback
Selecting sound program (☞p. 45):
SOURCE RECEIVER
TV
CD
g Turning on Pure Direct mode (☞p. 44):
Press gPURE DIRECT
Turning on Compressed Music Enhancer
mode (☞p. 44):
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Press gSTRAIGHT
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Turning on Straight decoding mode:
Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers.
Plays back audio from a playback source without
applying sound field effects, using an appropriate
decoder to split the signal into multiple channels.
Press gMUSIC repeatedly to select “2ch
Stereo.”
Press gSTRAIGHT to enable the straight
decoding mode.
Press gENHANCER repeatedly
DISPLAY
MUSIC
Sound program categories
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
VOL.
MOVIE
REC
VOL.
Sci-Fi
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Program
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
• You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel
display to check what speakers are currently
outputting sound (☞p. 10).
• You can adjust sound field elements (sound field
parameters) for each of the programs (☞p. 78).
Straight
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
Sci-Fi
VOL.
SW
2ch Stereo
L
R
R
SR
SBR
To disable stereo playback, press any of the
gSound selection keys to select a sound program
other than “2ch Stereo.”
To disable straight decoding mode, press
gSTRAIGHT again.
MOVIE
Playback channels other than the front channels in the
playback source are mixed with the front channels and
played back through the front speakers.
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Previously selected program
g Sound selection keys
g MOVIE
g MUSIC
g ENHANCER
g SUR. DECODE
g STRAIGHT
g PURE DIRECT
En
42
PLAYBACK
Enjoying the desired sound field effect
■ Enjoying sound programs without
■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields
■ Enjoying sound programs without
This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to enjoy
sound field surround effects, even without any surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You can even enjoy surround sound
presence with just a minimal configuration of the front speakers
only.
This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode automatically
when surround speakers are unavailable. J1
CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates an intensive and accurate
stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.
Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full
advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP 3D mode. Do the
following steps and then select a CINEMA DSP sound program
(☞p. 45). J3
This unit allows you to use virtual presence speakers to create an
intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field, even when no
presence speakers are connected (Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D
mode). You can even enjoy surround sound presence with front
speakers, center speaker, and surround speakers.
This unit automatically switches to Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D
mode when presence speakers are not available.
Do the following steps and then select a CINEMA DSP sound
program (☞p. 45).
surround sound speakers
■ Enjoying sound programs with
headphones
Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the
reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT CINEMA
mode). J2
(CINEMA DSP 3D mode)
•
•
•
•
presence speakers
Connect the presence speakers to the EXTRA SP jacks (☞p. 17).
Set “Front Presence” to “Use” (☞p. 85).
Set “Power Amp Assign” to “7ch Normal”(☞p. 84).
Enable CINEMA DSP 3D in the OPTION menu (☞p. 50).
When a sound program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator on the front panel lights up.
• Connect the front speakers, center speaker, and surround speakers.
• Enable center speaker and surround speakers in “Configuration”
(☞p. 85).
• Enable CINEMA DSP 3D in the OPTION menu (☞p. 50).
Lights up
MUSIC
VOL.
3
Hall in Vienna
PL
L
SL
SW
C
PR
R
SR
J 1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available under the following
J 2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available under the following
conditions:
• When headphones are connected to this unit.
• When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.
• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
conditions:
• When a “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.
• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
J 3 : However, CINEMA DSP 3D mode is not available under the following
conditions:
• When headphones are connected to this unit.
• When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.
• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
En
43
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Enjoying the desired sound field effect
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality
SOURCE RECEIVER
(Pure Direct mode)
HDMI
1
2
3
4
Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is
enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry. J1
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
Press gPURE DIRECT to turn Pure Direct mode
on. J2
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
To disable Pure Direct mode, press
gPURE DIRECT again.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
g
■ Enjoying enhanced compression
artifacts (Compressed Music
Enhancer mode)
Compressed Music Enhancer mode improves the sound
enhancer near to the original depth and width of
compression artifacts. J3
This mode can be used along with any other DSP modes.
Press gENHANCER to turn Compressed Music
Enhancer mode on.
ENT
To disable Compressed Music Enhancer mode, press
gENHANCER again.
MUTE
g ENHANCER
g PURE DIRECT
J 1 : The following features are disabled in Pure Direct mode.
• sound program, tone control, YPAO PEQ, and Adaptive DRC
• displaying and operating the OPTION menu and Setup menu
J 2 : While Pure Direct mode is on, the front panel display screen turns
off in order to reduce noise. When turning Pure Direct mode off,
the screen returns on.
J 3 : However, Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not available in
the following audio:
• Signals of which sampling rate is over 48kHz
• High Definition stream
En
44
PLAYBACK
Enjoying the desired sound field effect
Sound programs
Action Game
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer mode for a more
dynamic sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth
to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects
and dialog from a wide variety of scenes.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer mode for a more
dynamic sound field.
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz
music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field
that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments,
and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
in the table indicates the sound program for CINEMA DSP.
■ Category: MOVIE
Sound programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games.
Standard
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the
original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has
been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It
reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies
with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to
large, impressive sounds.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically
created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and
background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the
sound.
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from
serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an
optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically
around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even
after long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in
an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion
and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound
depth.
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety
programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and
sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands
in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.
En
45
PLAYBACK
Enjoying the desired sound field effect
■ Category: MUSIC
■ Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode)
This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs.
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel audio
sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder.
Hall in Munich
Hall in Vienna
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using
stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine,
beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual
seat is at the center left of the arena.
This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is
traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from
all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a
palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber
music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,
live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460
seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once.
The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant
sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel
signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right
speakers.
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel
sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all
speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at
parties, etc.
q Pro Logic
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio
sources.
q PLIIx Movie /
q PLII Movie
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for movies. J1
q PLIIx Music /
q PLII Music
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for music. J1
q PLIIx Game /
q PLII Game
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for games. J1
Neo:6 Cinema
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music.
J 1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:
• When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞p. 85).
• When headphones are connected.
En
46
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Configuring the settings of this unit while viewing the TV screen
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the OSD, you can view information of the
signals being input and the status of this unit. Visual guidance simplifies operations for menus.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
Basic operations via the TV screen
display
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and
press kENTER.
A TV screen is required to display the ON SCREEN
or OPTION menu. Refer to “Connecting a TV
monitor” for instructions on connecting a TV screen
(☞p. 22).
MUSIC
SLEEP
1
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
■ Selecting an input source
RADIO
• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON
SCREEN menu.
• In addition to selecting an input source, detailed
settings for each input source can be configured. Refer
to “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞p. 72)
for details.
j
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
k
This section describes basic operations for configuring
“Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program” using the OSD.
Press jON SCREEN.
The ON SCREEN menu is displayed on the TV screen.
Input source icons are displayed at the bottom of the
TV screen.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
2
Use kCursor D / E to select a Input source
press kENTER.
The input source is selected.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
En
47
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Configuring the settings of this unit while viewing the TV screen
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Selecting a scene
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Selecting a sound program
HDMI
1
2
3
4
1
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
V-AUX
AV
1
Use kCursor B / C to select “Scene” and
press kENTER.
1
Use kCursor B / C to select “Sound
Program” and press kENTER.
NOTES
Menus can be operated and the status of this unit
confirmed from the following three main displays.
• ON SCREEN menu (☞p. 72)
• OPTION menu (☞p. 49)
• Content window (☞p. 53)
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
These menus and status features can be used to
configure more various functions in addition to
selecting “Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program.”
Refer to each references for details on menus and
status.
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Scene icons are displayed at the bottom of the TV
screen.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Sound program icons are displayed at the bottom of the
TV screen.
k
2
Use kCursor D / E to select a scene and
press kENTER.
The scene is selected.
2
Use kCursor D / E to select a sound
program and press kENTER.
The sound program is selected.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON
SCREEN menu.
• Refer to “Changing input settings with a single key
(SCENE function)” (☞p. 41) for details on the default
scene settings.
• Detailed SCENE function settings can be edited. Refer
to “Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)”
(☞p. 76) for details.
• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON
SCREEN menu.
• Refer to “Enjoying the desired sound field effect”
(☞p. 41) for various sound programs.
• You can configure the detailed settings for each sound
program. Refer to “Setting sound program parameters
(Sound Program menu)” (☞p. 78) for details.
En
48
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
This unit has a unique OPTION menu for each input source. OPTION menus can be used to enable features such as volume trim for compatible input sources or to display
audio/video data.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
d
OPTION menu operations are displayed on the front
panel display or TV screen. TV display is used here to
explain operation.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
OPTION menu display and setup
TUN./CH
MEMORY
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
r
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k
1
2
Use dInput selector to select an input
source to which options will be applied.
Press rOPTION.
The OPTION menu is displayed.
3
Use kCursor B / C to select the desired
setting and press kENTER.
5
Press rOPTION to close the OPTION menu.
Parameters of the selected item are displayed.
4
Use kCursor B / C / D / E to select the
desired item (or enable a function).
The keys on the remote control may not respond for a
few seconds after the OPTION menu is closed.
Should this occur, select the input source again.
• Press kRETURN to display the previous screen or
close the OPTION menu.
• The OPTION menu may close automatically when
some functions are enabled.
OPTION menu
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d Input selector
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
r OPTION
The displayed OPTION menu settings differ
depending on the input source.
For more information, refer to the “OPTION menu” on
the next page.
En
49
PLAYBACK
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)
OPTION menu
SIRIUS
The following items are provided for each input source. J1
HDMI1-5
AV1-4
AV5-6
AUDIO1-2
V-AUX
TUNER
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
Dialogue Lift
Extended
Surround
Volume Trim
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
Dialogue Lift
Extended
Surround
Volume Trim
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
Dialogue Lift
Volume Trim
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
DOCK
(iPod)
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
Dialogue Lift
Volume Trim
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
Volume Trim
Shuffle J2
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
Dialogue Lift
Volume Trim
Pairing
Dialogue Lift
Repeat J2
DOCK
(Bluetooth)
Connect/
Disconnect
MULTI CH
Volume Trim
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
Dialogue Lift
Volume Trim
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
Dialogue Lift
Extended
Surround
Volume Trim
Tone Control
Adaptive DRC
CINEMA DSP 3D
Mode
Dialogue Lift
Volume Trim
J 1 : When “Tone Control,” “Adaptive DRC,” “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode,”
“Dialogue Lift,” or “Extended Surround” is adjusted for an input source, the
same value is applied to other input sources and “ALL” is displayed on the
front panel display. When settings specific to a certain input source are
selected, the input source name is displayed on the front panel display. If the
name of the input source has been changed (☞p. 73), the original name of the
■ Adjusting high/low-frequency sound
Tone Control
Input source:
All input sources except MULTI CH
You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble)
and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front
left and right speakers to obtain desired tone.
Adjustable range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
• The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set
separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones
connected.
• TONE CONTROL on the front panel can also be used (☞p. 40).
input source is displayed.
J 2 : Not available for Yamaha iPod wireless receiver.
En
50
PLAYBACK
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)
■ Auto-adjusting the sound level to make
even low volumes more audible
■ Adjusts the vertical position of dialogues
■ Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback
method
Dialogue Lift
Adaptive DRC
Input source:
Input source:
All input sources except MULTI CH
Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level
(from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at
low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “On.” J1
On
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Off (Default)
Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
Extended Surround
All input sources except MULTI CH
Adjusts the vertical position of center sound such as dialogues
when presence speakers are used. Increasing this parameter raises
the position.
Input source:
Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or
7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used.
Auto (Default)
The ideal dialog
position
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a
flag for reproducing surround back channel is present,
and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
q PLIIx Movie
If the dialog seems to come out from a lower position than the
video monitor screen, increase this parameter.
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not
surround back channel signals are contained. You can
select this parameter when two surround back
speakers are connected.
q PLIIx Music
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether
or not surround back channel signals are contained.
You can select this parameter when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for
input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing
surround back channel is present, and always
reproduces signals in 6.1-channel.
Off
Always reproduces original channels whether or not
the flag for reproducing surround back channel is
present.
When “On” is selected, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.
On
Off
Input Level
Volume: low
Output Level
Output Level
If the volume level is low, the dynamic range is narrow.
If the volume level is high, the dynamic range is wide.
On
Off
Input Level
Volume: high
■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Input source:
All input sources except MULTI CH
When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, set whether to use sound
programs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode (☞p. 43).
HDMI1-5, AV1-4, V-AUX J2
Move up to the ideal
dialog position
“0” (default) corresponds to the lowest position and “5” to the
highest position.
• “Dialogue Lift” can be adjusted only when the presence speakers
are available.
• You cannot move the dialog position lower than the default
setting.
J 1 : “Adaptive DRC” is also effective when you use headphones.
J 2 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when “Audio Return Channel” is on,
and the input source is used for “TV Audio Input.”
En
51
PLAYBACK
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)
■ Adjusting volume between input sources
Volume Trim
Input source:
■ Repeat playback with iPod/iPhone
Repeat
Input source:
All
Reduces any change in volume when switching between input
sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You
can adjust this parameter for each input source.
DOCK (iPod) J1
Plays songs or albums repeatedly. When the repeat function is
enabled, “
(One)” or “
(All)” appears on the TV screen.
Off
The repeat function is turned off.
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB
One
Plays a song back repeatedly.
Default setting
0.0 dB
All
When all songs have completed playback, returns to
the start and repeats playback.
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB steps
Adjustable range
■ Shuffle playback with iPod/iPhone
■ Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth
component
Connect
Shuffle
Input source:
DOCK (iPod) J1
Plays back songs or albums in random order. When the shuffle
function is enabled, “ ” appears on the TV screen.
Off
The shuffle function is turned off.
Songs
Plays songs back in random order.
Albums
Plays albums back in random order.
Disconnect
Input source:
DOCK (Bluetooth)
Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off
(☞p. 70).
■ Pairing Bluetooth component
Pairing
Input source:
DOCK (Bluetooth)
Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 70).
J 1 : Not available for Yamaha iPod wireless receiver.
En
52
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Confirming and operating input sources from the Content window
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
When DOCK, TUNER, or SIRIUS is selected, the Content window is displayed on the TV screen. Playback style for iPod, functions for FM/AM tuner, and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio tuner can be set in the Content window.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
d
TUNER
A TV screen is required to display the Content
window. Refer to “Connecting a TV monitor” for
instructions on connecting a TV monitor (☞p. 22).
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Displaying the Content window on
the TV screen
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Press dDOCK, dTUNER or dSIRIUS to display
the Content window.
k The Content window consists of two main displays, the
Now playing view and the Content browse view.
l
Below is the example of the Now playing view for TUNER.
c Screen button area
Buttons to operate each input source are displayed here.
These buttons vary depending on the selected input. For
details on operations for each input, see the following.
– FM/AM tuner (☞p. 56)
– SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (☞p. 63)
– iPod (☞p. 66)
• In the Now playing view, press kENTER and use
kCursor B / C to select the button. Then press
kENTER to execute the selection.
• In the Content browse view, press kCursor E and
use kCursor B / C to select the button. Then press
kENTER to execute the selection.
• Press kRETURN repeatedly to exit from the
operation.
Content browse view
or
lDISPLAY
or
lDISPLAY
Now playing view
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Switching the display between the
Now playing view and the Content
browse view
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d DOCK
d TUNER
d SIRIUS
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
l DISPLAY
a
b
c
a Image display
Icon for each input source or album art is displayed.
b Information display
Information on the current input source is displayed.
You can switch the display between the Now playing
view and the Content browse view by the following
methods.
• Press lDISPLAY to cycle between the Now playing
view and the Content browse view.
• In the Now playing view, press kENTER and use
kCursor B / C to select the
icon. Then press
kENTER to switch to the Content browse view.
• In the Content browse view, press kCursor E and use
kCursor B / C to select the
icon. Then press
kENTER to switch to the Now playing view.
En
53
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
FM/AM tuning
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of
the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the
best reception.
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
AV
TUNER
d
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
e
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
1
2
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Selecting a frequency for reception
(Normal tuning)
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
Press eFM or eAM to select a band to
receive.
DISPLAY
3
Use eTUN./CH H / I to set a frequency to
receive.
eTUN./CH H
Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
on a higher frequency than the current one. J1
eTUN./CH I
Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
on a lower frequency than the current one. J1
Lights up when a broadcast Lights up when a stereo
is received from a station
broadcast is received
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
VOL.
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
FM87.5 MHz
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
STEREO
TUNED
R
SR
SBR
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
FM98.5 MHz
■ Entering a frequency number
m
In normal tuning mode, use the mNumeric keys to
enter a frequency. Leave the decimal point out when
entering a number. J2
For example, enter as follows to select a station on
98.5 MHz.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
9
8
■ Registering stations manually (Manual
Preset)
Select stations manually and register them as presets
individually.
1
Tune in to the station you want to
register, referring to “Selecting a
frequency for reception (Normal tuning).”
2
Use one of the following methods to
register the station you are currently
receiving.
■ Registering to a preset number to which
no station is registered
Press eMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer.
The station will be registered automatically to the
lowest open preset number (or the next number after
the one registered most recently).
MEMORY
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
01:FM98.5 MHz
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Registered frequencies
5
d TUNER
e FM
e AM
e MEMORY
e TUN./CH H / I
m Numeric keys
J 1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has
started.
J 2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you
enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that
the frequency entered is correct.
En
54
PLAYBACK
MAIN
FM/AM tuning
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Designating a preset number for
registration
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
AUDIO
Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset”
on the front panel display. After a small wait, the
preset number that the station has been registered to
will appear.
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
e
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
TV
CD
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
01:Empty
SCENE
BD
DVD
The newly registered frequency
985
MUSIC
SLEEP
Preset number
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Blinks
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset number
to register the station to, and then press eMEMORY
to register.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
Empty, or the frequency
registered most previously
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
m
5
6
7
9
0
10
8
To select a registered station, press
ePRESET F / G to select the preset number
of the station. J1
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
e MEMORY
e PRESET F / G
m Numeric keys
J 1 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the
mNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you
want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.”
appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered
the correct number.
En
55
PLAYBACK
MAIN
FM/AM tuning
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Confirming and operating the
FM/AM tuner from the Content
window
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
AUDIO
Screen buttons on the Now playing view
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
Manual Tuning
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
The station currently received can be confirmed from the
d menu displayed on the TV screen. Various FM/AM tuner
operations can be performed from the Content window
rather than controls on the front panel display. The
Content window is displayed when dTUNER is
pressed.
You can operate the FM/AM tuner from the Now playing
view or the Content browse view.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
■ Operating from the Now playing
view
k
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
d
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
c
e
g
f
ENT
You can call preset stations.
PRESET -
Selects the previous preset number.
PRESET +
Selects the next preset number.
Preset -8
Returns the previous page.
FM
Switches a band to FM.
Preset +8
Goes to the next page.
AM
Switches a band to AM.
Direct
Tuning -
Decreases the frequency.
Selects a station directly by entering the
preset number.
Tuning +
Increases the frequency.
Memory
Auto -
Automatically searches for a station on a
lower frequency than the current station.
Registers the station currently received as
a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations
can be registered.
Auto +
Automatically searches for a station on a
higher frequency than the current station.
a b
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by
specifying its frequency.
Preset Select
Direct
Selects the frequency manually.
Memory
Registers the station currently received as
a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations
can be registered.
Utility
FM Mode
Selects “Stereo” or “Mono” when
receiving the FM station.
Scroll
Switches the scroll target.
INPUT
Browse
MUTE
a Tuned indicator
b
d TUNER
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
c
d
e
f
g
Lights up when a station is received.
Stereo indicator
Lights up when a stereo broadcast is received. When “FM
Mode” is set to “Mono,” the indicator does not light.
Preset number
The selected preset number is displayed.
Band
The selected band (FM or AM) is displayed.
Frequency
The frequency currently received is displayed.
Frequency guide
The frequency currently received is displayed as a cursor
on the bar.
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now playing view” for details.
Switches the display to the Content browse view.
Continues to the
next page
En
56
PLAYBACK
MAIN
FM/AM tuning
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Operating from the Content browse
SOURCE RECEIVER
view
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Now playing view.
AUDIO
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
a
b
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
a Preset station list
OPTION
ON SCREEN
The list of preset stations is displayed.
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k
b Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Content browse view” for details.
MUTE
Screen buttons on the Content browse view
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
Utility
INPUT
MUTE
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
Auto Preset
Detects stations with a strong signal and
automatically registers up to 40 stations,
beginning with the next number after the
current number.
Clear Preset
Clears registration of the preset station
currently selected.
Clear All Preset
Clears registration of all preset stations.
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
En
57
PLAYBACK
Listening to Satellite Radio
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your Sirius-Ready receiver. SIRIUS Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and
college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic
and weather and news from your most trusted sources.
Once you’ve purchased a SIRIUS tuner you’ll need to activate it and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the SIRIUS tuner. There
are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of XM” programming to the SIRIUS service. The “Best of XM” service is not available to SIRIUS Canada
subscribers at this time. Please check with SIRIUS Canada for any updates using the numbers and web address below.
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children.
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
SIRIUS Radio Legal
SIRIUS and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS
subscription sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. SIRIUS tuner required (sold separately) to receive the SIRIUS service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited
to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio System.
Service not available in Alaska or Hawaii.
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS
jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the instruction
manuals provided with the SiriusConnect tuner.
SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna
(sold separately)
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
S
US
PR
75
PB
VIDEO
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at
or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The
orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs depending
on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the
SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna. You can
mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the Antenna information on the front panel display or the
SIRIUS information screen on the TV screen (☞p. 63) to check
the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the
antenna.
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall
outlet.
NOTES
• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on
the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner
or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the
SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna.
• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this
unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.
Y
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
To the AC wall outlet
En
58
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to Satellite Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
subscription
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
V-AUX
AV
1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you
need to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio
subscription. To activate the subscription you need the
d
Sirius ID which is uniquely assigned to the
SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is 12-digit number which
is indicated on the package of the SiriusConnect tuner
and on the label of the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is
also configured on the front panel display when you tune
into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel “0.”
■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your
OPTION
ON SCREEN
SiriusConnect tuner
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
1
Press dSIRIUS.
2
Press m0 and then mENT to display the
Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.
3
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate
your subscription.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
Contact for activation
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
Status messages appear on the front panel display and
the TV screen during the activation. For details, see
“SIRIUS Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 110). Once the
activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED” appears.
2
3
4
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
operations
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
ENT
m
“000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx”
(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of
your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the
front panel display.
1
The SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel
display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
(such as channel number, channel name, category,
artist name, or song title) for the currently selected
channel appears on the front panel display. J1
Write down the Sirius ID in the space provided below.
ID:________________________________________
d SIRIUS
m0
m ENT
ALL
184Weather
2
Search for a channel by using one of the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.
All channel search mode
Selects a channel from the all channel list (☞p. 60).
Direct number access mode
Selects a channel directly by entering the channel
number (☞p. 60).
Press dSIRIUS to select “SIRIUS” as the
input source.
SIRIUS
• Before activating your subscription, you can only
select “184” or “000.”
• If a status message or an error message appears on the
front panel display or TV screen, refer to “SIRIUS
Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 110).
Category search mode
Selects a channel by category (☞p. 60).
REC
1
NOTES
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Preset search mode
Selects a channel from the preset channels (☞p. 61).
You can preset channels by registering them to specific
numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in.
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio information can be displayed
on the front panel display and the TV screen (☞p. 63).
• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe,
“CALL SIRIUS on the front panel display” or “CALL
888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears on the
TV screen.
Channel number Channel name
J 1 : When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit
automatically calls the previously selected channel.
En
59
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to Satellite Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ All channel search mode
SOURCE RECEIVER
NOTE
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
Press eTUN./CH H / I repeatedly to search for
a channel within all channels.
4
AUDIO
AV
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
All channel search mode
DOCK
SIRIUS
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
e
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
001Hits 1
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
ALL
RADIO
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding eTUN./CH H / I.
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category
by pressing eCATEGORY D / E.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
■ Category search mode
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
1
MUTE
REC
Press eCATEGORY D / E to select the
channel category.
When you select the category, the first channel in the
category is selected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
m
Category
search mode
INPUT
SIRIUS
MUTE
The first channel in the category
CAT001
Pop
VOL.
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
R
SR
SBR
Category name
e TUN./CH H / I
e CATEGORY D / E
e MEMORY
m Numeric keys
m ENT
If you don’t operate within 10 seconds, the category
search mode returns to “ALL (All Channel Search).”
2
This unit skips the following channels in all channel
search mode or category search mode. This is not a
malfunction.
• channels that are locked (☞p. 63)
• channels that are not currently in service
• channels that you do not subscribe to
■ Direct number access mode
Registering and recalling the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels
Up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels can be
registered as preset channels.
■ Registering preset channels
1
Press the mNumeric keys to enter the desired
three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press “1,” “2” and
then “3” of the mNumeric keys.
• When entering a one-digit or two-digit channel
number, enter the number using the mNumeric
keys and then press mENT to confirm your entry.
• This unit automatically accepts your entry if you do
not press mENT within a few seconds after entering
the number.
• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears
on the front panel display. Enter the 4-digit Parental
Lock code number by using the mNumeric keys or
press mENT to cancel (☞p. 63).
• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory
message may appear. For details, refer to “SIRIUS
Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 110).
• If this unit is in preset search mode, a preset number is
selected instead of a channel number when you press
the mNumeric keys. To switch to direct number
access mode, press eTUN./CH H / I.
Search for a channel to be registered.
For details on searching channels, refer to the
following pages.
• All channel search mode (☞p. 60)
• Category search mode (☞p. 60)
• Direct number access mode (☞p. 60)
2
Use one of the following methods to
register the channel currently received.
■ Registering to a preset number for which
no channel has been registered
Press and hold eMEMORY for at least 2 second.
The channel will be automatically registered to the
lowest available preset number (or the next number after
the last to which a channel was registered).
SIRIUS
MEMORY
VOL.
P01:001Preset
Preset number
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Registered channel
While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel
display, press eTUN./CH H / I repeatedly
to search for a channel within the selected
channel category.
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding eTUN./CH H / I.
En
60
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to Satellite Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Designating a preset number for
registration
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
Press eMEMORY once.
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
SIRIUS
AV
TUNER
Preset number
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
e
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Previously
registered channel
(or “---” if no
channel has been
registered)
Channel to be
registered
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset number to
which the channel will be registered and then press
eMEMORY to register.
SCENE
BD
DVD
VOL.
P01:--- << 001
CATEGORY
FM
MEMORY
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k
To cancel registration, press kRETURN or do not
operate the remote control for about 30 seconds.
MUTE
■ Recalling a preset channel (Preset
REC
Search mode)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
m Specify preset numbers to recall registered channels.
Preset number
INPUT
MUTE
e MEMORY
e PRESET F / G
k RETURN
m Numeric keys
ENT
SIRIUS
P01
001Hits1
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Press ePRESET F / G to change the preset
numbers (1 to 40).
• Preset numbers to which no channel has been
registered are skipped.
• Preset numbers can also be selected by pressing
mNumeric keys.
En
61
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to Satellite Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ information
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
AUDIO
AV
You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
on the front panel display. J1
NOTE
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
TUN./CH
f
MEMORY
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
Composer name, channel number
Antenna
Antenna reception level, channel number
Signal reception level
Channel number
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
■ Front panel display
SCENE
BD
DVD
If a status message or an error message appears on the
front panel display or TV screen, see “SIRIUS
Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 110).
Composer
TV
CD
Search mode
RADIO
SIRIUS
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Press fINFO repeatedly to toggle the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio information display modes as
shown below.
DISPLAY
Signal reception level
ALL008
Antenna
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Signal reception is shown in four levels.
Channel
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Channel number, channel name
REC
DSP Program
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
Current sound program (☞p. 45), channel number
Category
Channel category, channel number
INPUT
Audio Decoder
MUTE
Artist/Song
Current Audio Decoder (☞p. 41), channel number
Artist name, song title, channel number
f INFO
Back to “Channel”
J 1 : If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character
that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.
En
62
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to Satellite Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Confirming and operating Sirius
Satellite Radio™ from the Content
window
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
AUDIO
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
■ Operating from the Now playing
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP
MENU
Utility
The category of the channel is displayed.
g Artist Name
Parental Lock
Restricts the access to specified channel.
h Song Title
i
j
The title of the current song is displayed.
Composer Name
The composer name of the current song is displayed.
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now playing view” for details.
When the parental lock function is enabled for a
particular channel, that channel is skipped in all channel
search mode and category search mode.
1
Use kCursor D / E to select a number, and
press kENTER to enter the selected
number.
2
3
Repeat step 1 to enter the desired 4-digit
code number.
Screen buttons on the Now playing view
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
view
k
Radio Control
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
The channel name currently received is displayed.
f Channel Category
The artist name of the current song is displayed.
The Sirius channel currently received can be confirmed
d from the menu displayed on the TV screen. Various
Sirius Satellite Radio operations can be performed from
the Content window rather than controls on the front
panel display. The Content window is displayed when
dSIRIUS is pressed.
You can operate the Sirius Satellite Radio from the Now
playing view or the Content browse view.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
e Channel Name
MUTE
REC
HOLD
l
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
a
d
f
g
h
i
b
c
e
j
Select a channel for reception.
Memory
Register the current channel as a preset
number. Up to 40 channels can be
registered.
Preset -
Select the previous preset number.
Preset +
Select the next preset number.
CAT -
Select the previous category.
CAT +
Select the next category.
CH -
Scan channels downwards from the
current channel.
CH +
Scan channels upwards from the current
channel.
Direct
Specify a specific channel by manually
entering the channel number.
Hold
Activate the hold function. The artist
name and song title currently received
will remain displayed.
INPUT
MUTE
a HOLD indicator
Lights up when lHOLD is pressed to activate the hold
d SIRIUS
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
l HOLD
b
function. The artist name and song title currently received
will remain displayed. Press lHOLD again to cancel the
hold function.
Signal reception level
Indicates the signal reception level.
Weak signal
Use kCursor C to select “Enter,” and press
kENTER to confirm the 4-digit code
number.
Selecting “Clear” and pressing kENTER clears all
the code entered.
4
Use kCursor B / C to select the category
and press kENTER.
Continues to the
next page
Strong signal
c Preset number
The selected preset number is displayed.
d Channel number
The channel number currently received is displayed.
En
63
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to Satellite Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
5
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
AUDIO
Use kCursor B / C to select the channel to
be locked and press kENTER.
Check mark
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
Switches the scroll target (channel name, channel
category, artist name, song title, or composer name).
Now Playing
■ Operating from the Content browse
TUN./CH
1 Page Down
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
Switches the display to the Content browse view.
Switches the display to the Now playing view.
view
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
1 Page Up
Browse
CATEGORY
FM
Scroll
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
REC
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
m Numeric keys
m ENT
a
b
To lock channels in other categories, press
kRETURN to display the category selection screen,
and follow the procedure described above.
MUTE
1
When kENTER is pressed, the selected channel is
received for confirmation. Each time kENTER is
pressed after that, lock switches between on and off.
m
NOTES
• If a code number is already registered and the different
code number is entered, “Wrong Number” appears.
Use kCursor B / C to select Parental Lock and
press kENTER, and then enter the correct number.
• If you forget the parental lock code or want to change
it, reset it using “SR PIN” (☞p. 100).
Receiving locked channels
Use direct number access mode (☞p. 60) or preset
search mode (☞p. 61) to receive locked channels. When
a locked channel is received, “Locked” is displayed
followed by the parental lock code input screen. Use
mNumeric keys to enter the 4-digit code number,
select OK and then press mENT.
a Preset station list
The list of preset stations is displayed.
b Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Content browse view” for details.
Screen buttons on the Content browse view
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
Utility
Parental Lock
Restricts the access to specified channel.
Clear Preset
Clears registration of the preset station
currently selected.
Clear All Preset
Clears registration of all preset stations.
En
64
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote
control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound programs to give compressed audio
formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound (☞p. 44). A Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10, sold separately) can also be connected to this unit to play back
iPod/iPhone with wireless connection.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
d
• When playing back iPod/iPhone with wired
connection
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
f
Refer to “Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock.”
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
• When playing back iPod/iPhone with
wireless connection
Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™
Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the
dock. The unit is now ready for playback.
DOCK
After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press
dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/
iPhone.
The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two
ways.
VOL.
iPodconnected
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Refer to “Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless
connection” (☞p. 68).
DOCK
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Connecting the Yamaha iPod
universal dock
SIRIUS
PR
PB
VIDEO
Y
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
d DOCK
f INFO
ENT
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the
operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for
information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone.
• iPod touch, iPod (4th Gen/5th Gen/Classic), iPod
nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS
are supported (As of March 2010).
• When connecting iPhone, iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS,
use a YDS-12.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on
the model or the software version of your iPod/iPhone.
• Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha
iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses
on the YDS-12.
Yamaha iPod Universal Dock
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
O
(CD)
Locate the dock at the distance as far as from
the unit.
When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be
charged automatically (☞p. 74).
Menu browse control:
Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed
on the TV. Refer to “Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu
screen (Menu browse control)” (☞p. 66).
Simple remote control:
Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing
the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. Refer to
“Operating basic playback functions via the remote
control (Simple remote control)” (☞p. 68).
• Song information (artist, album, song) is displayed on
the front panel. Press fINFO repeatedly to display
subsequent/previous information.
• The Yamaha logo is displayed on the iPod screen
when iPod stationed in the iPod universal dock (does
not apply to the iPod touch or iPhone).
• Manual control of the iPod/iPhone is not possible
while the iPod stationed in the iPod universal dock.
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode
before connecting an iPod universal dock.
En
65
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu
screen (Menu browse control)
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
10 Pages Up
■ Operating from the Now playing
view
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
V-AUX
AV
1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
10 Pages Down
The iPod/iPhone can be operated from the menu
displayed on the TV screen.
d
You can operate the iPod/iPhone from the Now playing
view or the Content browse view.
MEMORY
view
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
1 Page Up
■ Operating from the Content browse
TUN./CH
1 Page Down
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
e
f
d
h
k
g
i
j
RADIO
a
OPTION
ON SCREEN
a b c
Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
k
b
d
c
MUTE
e
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
Switches the display to the Now playing view.
Close
Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu
display.
a
b
c
d
MUTE
e
d DOCK
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
Now Playing
Input name / List name
Menu items
Input icon
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Content browse view” for details.
Current menu number / Number of all menu items
1
2
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
Press kCursor B / C to select the content
(music or video) that you want to play, and
press kENTER. J1
Screen buttons on the Content browse view
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
3
Press kCursor B / C to select iPod/iPhone
menu items, and press kENTER to play.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
Repeat icon
Shuffle icon
Play icon
Album image
Artist name
Album title
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now playing view” for details.
Song title
Remaining time
Progress bar
Elapsed time
Screen buttons on the Now playing view
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
The Now playing view appears during playback.
J 1 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod
universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing
video files.
En
66
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Play Control
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
2
3
4
p (Play)
Starts playback.
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
s (Stop)
Stops playback.
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
e (Pause)
Stops playback temporarily.
b (Skip -)
Skips to the beginning of the currently
playing song. Press kENTER at the
beginning of the song to skip to a
previous song.
a (Skip +)
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
w (Scan -)
Searches backwards.
f (Scan +)
Searches forwards.
Operates the basic playback functions of iPod/iPhone.
AUDIO
AV
1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Scroll
Switches the scroll target (artist name, album name, or
song name).
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
Browse
Switches the display to the Content browse view.
INPUT
Close
MUTE
Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu
display.
k ENTER
En
67
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Operating basic playback functions
via the remote control (Simple
remote control)
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
V-AUX
AV
1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
d Use the following remote control keys to operate
(playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone.
Press lREC to enable the Simple remote control.
Press lREC again to return to the Menu browse
control.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Switches to the DOCK (iPod) input.
kCursor B / C
Move the cursor up and down to different
fields.
kRETURN
Returns to the previous menu.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
l
HOLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
d DOCK
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
k RETURN
l REC
ls
le
lp
lw
lf
lb
la
kENTER
Enables the selected menu.
lw
Searches backwards while held down.
lf
Searches forwards while held down.
lb
Skips to the beginning of the currently
playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips
one song backwards with each press.
la
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
ls
Stops playback.
le
Switches between playback and pause.
lp
Switches between playback and pause.
MUTE
REC
9
dDOCK
ENT
Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ with
wireless connection
A Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10, sold
separately) can be connected to this unit to play back
iPod/iPhone with wireless connection. The iPod/iPhone
can be used as the remote control. J1
Place the iPod/iPhone in the wireless transmitter. Setup
is complete.
DOCK
VOL.
■ Connecting the Yamaha iPod
wireless transmitter and playing
back iPod/iPhone
Use the dedicated cable to connect the wireless receiver
to the DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to
the operating instructions of the YID-W10 for more
information.
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, unplug the power cable of this
unit before connecting the iPod wireless receiver.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
iPodconnected
DOCK
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SIRIUS
Yamaha iPod
wireless receiver
PR
PB
VIDEO
Y
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
O
(CD)
12
A
3
B
Position the wireless receiver as far as possible
from the unit.
When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be
charged automatically, if “Standby Charge” is set to
“Auto” (☞p. 74) or “Power & Input” of “iPod Interlock”
is set to “On” (☞p. 75).
J 1 : Video signals cannot be transmitted wirelessly.
En
68
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Use iPod/iPhone to start playback.
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
When “iPod Interlock” → “Volume” in the Input
menu is set to “Off,” the volume of this unit is not
adjusted when iPod/iPhone volume controls are
adjusted (☞p. 75).
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
• Adjusting volume control on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts
the volume (max 0.0dB) of this unit.
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
d
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
CAUTION
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
• This unit, which is placed in the main zone, functions as
follows when iPod/iPhone controls are used to start
playback.
– The input source switches to DOCK (iPod) when this
unit is turned on.
– When this unit is in standby mode when iPod/iPhone
playback starts, this unit turns on and the input source
switches to DOCK (iPod). J1
• This unit automatically enters standby mode when the
following operations are performed.
– iPod/iPhone is removed from the YID-W10
– iPod/iPhone is not operated for a while after playback
is stopped
When iPod/iPhone controls are used to adjust volume,
playback volume may be unexpectedly loud. This
could result in damage to this unit or the speakers. If
the volume suddenly increases during playback,
immediately remove the iPod/iPhone from the
Yamaha iPod universal dock. “Max Volume” can be
used to specify the maximum volume level to prevent
excessively loud playback (☞p. 88).
INPUT
MUTE
d DOCK
• Pressing dDOCK also switches the input source to
DOCK (iPod).
• When a menu is operated, this function is not
activated.
• When “iPod Interlock” → “Power & Input” in the
Input menu is set to “Off,” the power and the input
source do not switch automatically (☞p. 75).
J 1 : This function is also activated when sound of application is
reproduced or ringtone is received.
En
69
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible
portable music players. J1
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
NOTE
d
When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection
you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
e
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
Pairing Bluetooth™ components
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
r DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit.
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be
k complete when this unit is turned on.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
DOCK
Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth
component for the first time, or when settings have been deleted.
Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth
component as necessary when carrying out pairing.
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be
paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When
the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the
device which has not been used for the longest period
of time will be deleted.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
1
2
3
6
7
Press rOPTION to display the OPTION
menu and use kCursor B / C to select
“Pairing.”
OPTION
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Pairing
4
Press kENTER to start pairing.
DOCK
VOL.
Searching...
4
SIRIUS
5
3
PR
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
8
PB
9
0
10
INPUT
ENT
Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
VIDEO
Y
MUTE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
O
(CD)
d DOCK
e MEMORY
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
k RETURN
r OPTION
1
2
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
• To cancel pairing, press kRETURN.
• You can also press and hold eMEMORY on the front
panel to begin pairing.
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with and set it to pairing mode.
Continues to the
next page
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode
before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
J 1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
of the Bluetooth profile.
En
70
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
5
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
AUDIO
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
Make sure the Bluetooth component
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
When the device is recognized, it will appear in the
Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10
YAMAHA.”
d
Using Bluetooth™ components
When pairing is complete, perform the following
procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this
unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless
connection is complete, Bluetooth components can be
played back.
3
When wireless connection is complete
DOCK
FM
AM
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
6
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
from the Bluetooth component list, and
enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth
component. J1
Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless
connection is established automatically or by
operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is
not necessary to carry out the following procedure.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RETURN
r
VOLUME
ENTER
When pairing occurs correctly
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
k
DOCK
Completed
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
1
2
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
Press rOPTION to display the OPTION
menu.
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
BTconnected
CATEGORY
INFO
Use kCursor B / C to select “Connect” and
press kENTER. J2
“Not found” is displayed when there is an error
connecting. Check that the following conditions have
been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless
connection again.
• Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired.
• The Bluetooth component is switched on.
• The Bluetooth component is within 32 ft. (10 m) of the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
4
Operate the Bluetooth component for
playback.
To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same
steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.”
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d DOCK
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
r OPTION
J 1 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is
carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is
displayed instead of “Completed.”
J 2 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been
connected.
En
71
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
Settings, such as the name of an input source or the icon displayed for an input source can be changed from the Input menu.
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
AV
TUNER
Configuring input sources
The name of an input source and its icon, as well as other
input source settings, can be changed from the Input
menu displayed on the TV screen.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
3
Use kCursor D / E to select an input source
to be configured and press kCursor B.
4
Use kCursor B / C to select an item and
press kENTER.
6
Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
1
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
Press jON SCREEN.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
2
Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and
press kENTER.
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
If the selected item contains additional items, use
kCursor B / C to select the desired item and press
kENTER.
5
Use kCursor B / C to adjust the setting.
Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings.
En
72
SETUP
MAIN
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Changing an input source name or
Input menu
SOURCE RECEIVER
icon
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
HDMI1-5
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
AV1-2
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
Audio In
Decoder
Mode
Enhancer
CATEGORY
FM
Rename/
Icon Select
TUN./CH
Rename/
Icon Select
Audio In
Decoder
Mode
Enhancer
Enhancer
Rename/Icon Select
Input source: HDMI1-5, AV1-6, AUDIO1-2, V-AUX, DOCK
(iPod), DOCK (Bluetooth), MULTI CH
Changes the input source name (up to nine characters)
and icon displayed on the front panel display or TV
screen.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
AV3-4
Rename/
Icon Select
Decoder
Mode
AV5-6
Rename/
Icon Select
Enhancer
AUDIO1-2
Rename/
Icon Select
Enhancer
V-AUX
Rename/
Icon Select
Decoder
Mode
Enhancer
TUNER
Enhancer
SIRIUS
Enhancer
DOCK (iPod)
Rename/
Icon Select
Enhancer
Standby
Charge
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
1
Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Rename/Icon Select” and press kENTER.
2
3
Use kCursor D / E to choose an icon and
press kCursor C.
4
Press kENTER and press kCursor C to
select “OK” and press kENTER.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
iPod
Interlock J1
INPUT
MUTE
DOCK (Bluetooth)
Rename/
Icon Select
Enhancer
MULTI CH
Rename/
Icon Select
Video Out
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
Press kENTER, and then press
kCursor B / C / D / E to edit the new input
name.
Confirm the new input name.
J 1 : Not available when playing back iPod/iPhone with wired
connection.
En
73
SETUP
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
■ Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source
video and audio
■ Setting the format of digital audio signals
Decoder Mode
Audio In
Input source:
Input source:
HDMI1-5, AV1-2
Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/
digital audio inputs in situations such as:
– an playback device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot
transmit audio through HDMI
– an playback device with component video output and analog
audio output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the
system
To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-5 or AV1-2)
as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this
menu.
Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input
jacks.
Audio inputs
Settings method
Optical digital audio
input
Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component
audio cable to the optical digital jack for the selected
input.
Coaxial digital audio
input
Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component
audio cable to the coaxial digital jack for the selected
input.
Analog audio input
HDMI1-5, AV1-4, V-AUX J1
Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For example, if
the format is not automatically detected correctly even during
playback of DTS format audio, this item can be used to set the
playback format to DTS.
Auto (Default)
The audio format is automatically selected to match
the format of the input audio.
DTS
Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not
reproduced.
■ Selecting the sound program suitable for
listening to compressed audio, such as
MP3
Enhancer
Input source:
All input sources other than MULTI CH
Turns on/off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
Off (Default)
Turns off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
On
Turns on the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
■ Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby
mode
Standby Charge
Input source:
DOCK (iPod)
Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock or
iPod wireless receiver while the receiver is in standby mode.
Auto (Default)
This unit charges iPod/iPhone when this unit is in
standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the
HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator lights. When
HDMI Through function is off, the indicator goes out
after the charging is complete.
Off
This unit does not charge iPod/iPhone.
Select one of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2.
Connect the external component audio cable to the
audio jack for the selected input.
J 1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when “Audio Return Channel” is on,
and the source is used for “TV Audio Input.”
En
74
SETUP
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
■ Setting the interlock functions with iPod/
iPhone (when a Yamaha iPod wireless
receiver is connected)
iPod Interlock
Input source:
■ Outputting a video signal input from
another input source while playing a
multi-channel audio signal
Video Out
DOCK (iPod)
This unit can be automatically operated in conjunction with
operations on iPod when the iPod wireless receiver is connected to
this unit.
Power & Input
Starting playback of iPod/iPhone turns on this unit
and switches the input source to DOCK (iPod)
automatically when this item is set to “On.” This unit
automatically enters standby mode when iPod/iPhone
is not operated for a while after playback is stopped.
This interlock function is disable with “Off.”
Volume
Adjusting the volume on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts
the volume of this unit when this item is set to “On.”
This interlock function is disable with “Off.”
When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, a video signal
input from another terminal can be output to the video monitor. For
example, even if an audio and video component such as a DVD
player that does not support a multi-channel digital audio output,
the video signal can be output to the video monitor while
reproducing a multi-channel analog audio signal.
En
75
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
The SCENE function (☞p. 41) can be edited from the SCENE menu displayed on the TV screen.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Editing a scene
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
Various settings, such as the name of a scene or the icon
displayed for a scene, can be changed from the SCENE
menu.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
1
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
3
Use kCursor D / E to select a scene to be
edited and press kCursor B.
5
Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the
setting.
Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust multiple
settings.
Press jON SCREEN.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
j
6
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
4
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.
Use kCursor B / C to select an item and
press kENTER.
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
2
Use kCursor B / C to select “Scene” and
press kENTER.
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
When the Utility is available in the selected item, use
kCursor B / C to select the desired item and press
kENTER.
En
76
SETUP
MAIN
Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SCENE menu
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
AUDIO
SCENE1
AV
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
SCENE2
Save
Load
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
SCENE3
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Save
Load
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Registers settings applied with “Setting.”
CANCEL
Cancels settings applied with “Setting.”
DETAIL
Specifies “SCENE IR” function and
displays settings registered with the
SCENE function in detail.
Foe more information, see “SCENE IR”
and “Detail” at right.
Save
Load
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
CATEGORY
FM
Ok
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
■ Registering SCENE function
settings
Save
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
Registers adjustments to SCENE menu setting for each
SCENE.
■ Adjusting settings to be registered
on the SCENE function
Load
Loads input sources or sound programs that have been
registered with the SCENE function, or specifies
whether or not an external component registered as the
input source is automatically turned on when a scene is
selected.
2
3
Use kCursor D / E to choose an icon and
press kCursor C.
Specify whether or not a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD
player connected to this unit turns on automatically.
Off
Disables the SCENE IR function.
Yamaha BD/DVD
Player1
Select this when a Yamaha BD/DVD
player is connected to this unit.
Yamaha BD/DVD
Player2
Select this if the player dose not turn on
when “Yamaha BD/DVD Player1” is
selected.
Yamaha CD Player
Select this when a Yamaha CD player is
connected to this unit.
SCENE4
Save
Load
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Rename/Icon Select” and press kENTER.
SCENE IR
MUTE
REC
1
4
Press kENTER, and then press
kCursor B / C / D / E to edit the new scene
name.
Press kENTER and press kCursor C to
select “OK” and press kENTER.
Confirm the new scene name.
Detail
Display details of settings registered with the SCENE
function.
■ Resetting a scene
Reset
Input
Displays “Input” setting registered with
the SCENE function.
Mode
Displays the sound program registered
with the SCENE function.
Enhancer
Displays the setting of “Enhancer”
registered with the SCENE function.
Restores all settings to their default values.
■ Changing a scene name and icon
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front
panel display or TV screen.
En
77
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Sound effects can be adjusted from the Sound Program menu.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Editing sound programs
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
Adjust sound field elements (sound program parameters)
to achieve sound effects suited to the acoustics of audio/
video sources or rooms if you are not satisfied with the
results achieved with default sound program settings.
Follow the procedure described below to adjust sound
program parameters.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
3
Use kCursor D / E to select a sound
program and press kCursor B.
Sound programs
TV
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
1
2
Press jON SCREEN.
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Press jON SCREEN to close the Sound
Program menu.
■ To initialize sound program parameters
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Sound Program” and press kENTER.
4
REC
Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the
parameter and press kRETURN. J1
When there are multiple parameters in the selected
sound program, repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust other
parameters.
6
SCENE
BD
DVD
5
Use kCursor B / C to select a parameter
and press kENTER.
To set the parameters of the sound program back to
their default settings, use kCursor B / C repeatedly
to select “Reset” in step 4 and press kENTER.
When the following message is displayed, select
“OK” and press kENTER to initialize.
Sound program parameters
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
Choices
To cancel initializing, select “CANCEL” and press
kENTER when the message above is displayed.
J 1 : An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter
name displayed on the TV when you change the parameter from
its default setting.
En
78
SETUP
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Default setting
0 dB
Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:
Surround Room Size
Surround Back Initial Delay
Surround Back Room Size
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field
initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by
adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound
field seems to the listener.
Adjustable range
1 to 99 ms (Initial Delay)
1 to 49 ms (Surround Initial Delay and Surround Back
Initial Delay)
• The effect sound is too soft.
• There are no differences between effects of the sound programs.
→ Increase the effect level.
• The sound is dull.
• The sound field effect is added too much.
→ Reduce the effect level.
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size.
Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value,
the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is
repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer
the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent
reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds,
you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing
this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the
room.
Adjustable range
Source sound
0.1 to 2.0
Level
Level
Early
reflections
Time
Delay
Source sound
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Audio source
Time
Time
Time
Audio source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Early
reflections
Level
Adjustable range
Surround Initial Delay
Level
Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added).
You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the
sound effect.
Room Size
Level
DSP Level
Initial Delay
Level
CINEMA DSP parameters
Large value = 99 ms
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also
recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size
parameters likewise.
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend
that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters
likewise.
En
79
SETUP
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
Reverb Time
Surround Liveness
Surround Back Liveness
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the
reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at
which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of an audio
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent
wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A
room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,”
while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.”
This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and
thus the “liveness” of the room.
Reverb Delay
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the
dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz.
This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an
extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more
sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get
articulate sound.
Adjustable range
Adjustable range
Reverberation
Source sound
60 dB
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
60 dB
60 dB
Reverberation
Short
reverberation
Source sound
Reverberation
Early reflections
Rev. Time
0 to 10
0 to 250 ms
1.0 to 5.0 s
Time
Adjustable range
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the
beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the
reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the
reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Level
Liveness
Time
Rev. Time
Time
Time
Rev. Time
Long
reverberation
Rev. Delay
Rev. Time
Audio source
Time
Small reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Level
Dead
Level
Level
Live
Time
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Time
Large reflected
sound
Large value = 10
En
80
SETUP
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
Reverb Level
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation
sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation
becomes.
2ch Stereo only
Direct
0 to 100%
Level
Adjustable range
Parameters usable in certain sound
programs
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit
depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog
audio source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.
Source sound
Auto (Default)
Rev. Level
Off
Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone
control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and
“Treble” are set to 0dB.
Surround R Level
Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
100%
Surround Back L Level
Adjusts the volume of the surround back L channel. J2
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
35% (7.1-channel configuration)
50% (6.1-channel configuration)
Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit.
Time
Surround Back R Level
7ch Stereo only
Decode Type
Adjusts the volume of the surround back R channel. J2
Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound program in the
MOVIE category. J1
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder.
Neo:6 Cinema
Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder.
Center Level
Adjusts the center channel volume. J2
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
100%
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
35% (7.1-channel configuration)
50% (6.1-channel configuration)
Front Presence L Level
Surround L Level
Adjusts the volume of the front presence L channel. J2
Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2
J 1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
100%
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
33%
J 2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.
sound programs.
• Mono Movie
• Sports
• Action Game
• Roleplaying Game
En
81
SETUP
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
Front Presence R Level
Parameters usable in surround decoder
Adjusts the volume of the front presence R channel. J1
Decode Type
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
33%
Selects a surround decoder.
Pro Logic
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources.
PLIIx Movie /
PLII Movie
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
movies. J2
PLIIx Music /
PLII Music
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
music. J2
PLIIx Game /
PLII Game
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
games. J2
Neo:6 Cinema
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
is suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
is suitable for music.
Center Width
Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right
speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0
for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7
for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only.
Adjustable range
0 to 7
Default setting
3
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and
the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level
created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred
sound balance.
The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more
negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
more positive.
Adjustable range
-3 to +3
Default setting
0
Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only
When Neo:6 Music is selected
Panorama
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/
right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
Off (Default)
Disables the effect.
On
Enables the effect.
Center Image
Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as
necessary.
Adjustable range
0.0 to 1.0
Default setting
0.3
J 1 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.
J 2 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:
• When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞p. 85).
• When headphones are connected.
En
82
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Various settings, such as speaker volume or HDMI functions, can be changed from the Setup menu.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Operating the Setup menu
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
1
2
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Setup menu setting
Speaker
Adjusts parameters for speakers, such as
speaker status, and volume adjustment for
each speaker.
Sound
Sets functions related to audio output,
such as adjustment of maximum volume
and of dynamic range.
Video
Sets video output functions, such as video
conversion settings (resolution and aspect
ratio).
HDMI
Sets HDMI functions, such as the HDMI
Control function and output destination
for HDMI sound.
Press jON SCREEN.
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Setup” and press kENTER.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Multi Zone
Sets multi-zone functions, such as
volume adjustment for speakers in the
secondary zone.
Function
Sets functions such as the Auto Power
Down function, that make the unit easier
to use.
Language
Selects the language of the menus and
messages displayed on TV screen.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
3
Use kCursor D / E to select a menu and
press kENTER.
4
Use kCursor B / C to select an item and
press kENTER.
When the selected item contains detailed ones, use
kCursor B / C to select the detailed item and press
kENTER.
5
Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the
setting.
Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings.
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
6
Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.
En
83
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Setup menu
Manages settings for speakers
■ Manual speaker setup
Manual Setup
The following parameters can be specified manually.
Speaker
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Sound
Lipsync
Dynamic Range
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Adaptive DSP Level
Speaker Setup items
Video
Analog to Analog Conversion
Processing
HDMI
HDMI Control
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
TV Audio Input
Audio Output
Standby Through
Multi Zone
Auto Setup
Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically.
Manual Setup
Manually adjusts parameters for speakers.
Power Amp Assign
Adds the extra speakers to the 7.1-channel speaker
connection.
Configuration
Manually manages speaker configuration, such as
speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass
audio processing.
Distance
Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on
distance to the listening position.
Level
Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Parametric EQ
Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output
characteristics.
Test Tone
Generates test tones.
■ Automatic speaker setup
Auto Setup
Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically using YPAO
(☞p. 33).
Power Amp Assign
In addition to the 7.1-channel speaker connection, various speaker
configurations are possible using the presence speakers connection,
bi-amp connection or Zone2 function (☞p. 17, p. 18).
Zone2 Set
Function
Auto Power Down
Display Set
Trigger Output
Memory Guard
Language
En
84
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Configuration
Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on
manually set parameters.
In the “Configuration,” you can select the speaker size
characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound
reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers.
Front
Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front
speakers. J1
Large
Small (Default)
Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will
produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will
produce front channel low-frequency
components. J2
Center
Selects the size of the center speakers.
Woofer diameter
• 6-1/4 in (16 cm) or larger → Large
• 6-1/4 in (16 cm) or smaller → Small
When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components
of the speakers that you configured are produced from the
subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer).
Large
Select this when a large center speaker is connected.
Small (Default)
Select this when a small center speaker is connected.
None
Select this when there is no center speaker. The front
speakers will produce center channel audio.
Surround
Selects the size of the surround speakers.
Large
Select this when the surround speakers are large.
Small (Default)
Select this when the surround speakers are small.
None
Select this when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel
audio signals.
• When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround
back speaker even if that speaker is connected.
• When set to “None,” the sound programs will change to Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode.
Surround Back
Selects the size of the surround back speakers.
Largex1
Select when one large surround back speaker is
connected.
Largex2
Select when two large surround back speakers are
connected.
Smallx1
Select when one small surround back speaker is
connected.
Smallx2 (Default)
Select when two small surround back speakers are
connected.
None
Select this when no surround back speakers are
connected.
• When there are no surround speakers are connected, the setting
will automatically change to “None.”
• You can set surround back audio signals, including from the
playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single
speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right
surround speakers (5.1-channel layout).
Front Presence
Specify connection of front presence speakers.
Use (Default)
Select this when front presence speakers are
connected.
None
Select this when front presence speakers are not
connected.
J 1 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front
speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will
automatically change to “Large.”
J 2 : You can set the low-frequency components of audio signals transmitted from
the front speakers to the subwoofer by using “Bass Cross Over.”
En
85
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Subwoofer
Confirms the subwoofer.
Use (Default)
Select this when subwoofer is connected. During
playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the
LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio
from other channels. J1
None
Select this when subwoofer is not connected. The
front speakers will produce audio from the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel and bass frequency audio
from other channels.
Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or
unclear.
Normal (Default)
Does not change the subwoofer phase.
Reverse
Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Extra Bass
Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be
produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer
and the front speakers.
Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component which is
produced from speakers of which the size is set to “Small.”
A frequency sound which is lower than the specified frequency will
be produced from the subwoofer or the front speakers. J2
Level
Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Use kCursor B / C to select the desired speaker, and press
kENTER. Then use kCursor D / E to adjust the volume for the
selected speaker.
40Hz
110Hz
60Hz
120Hz
Adjustable range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
80Hz (Default)
160Hz
Default setting
90Hz
200Hz
0.0 dB (Front L/Front R/Center/Surround L/Surround
R/Surround Back L/Surround Back R/Front Presence
L/Front Presence R/Subwoofer)
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
100Hz
Distance
Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that
sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same
time.
Selecting adjustment units
Use kCursor B / C to select the unit for distance (meters or
feet), and press kENTER.
Setting distances for each speaker
Off (Default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the
front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front
channel low-frequency components.
On
The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the
front channel low-frequency components.
When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” or “Front” is set to “Small,”
“Extra Bass” is disabled.
Use kCursor B / C to select the speaker you want to configure,
and press kENTER. Then use kCursor D / E to set the distance
from the speaker to your listening position.
Adjustable range
1.0 ft to 80.0 ft (0.30 m to 24.0 m)
Default setting
10.0 ft (3.00 m) (Front L/Front R/Center/Surround L/
Surround R/Surround Back L/Surround Back R/Front
Presence L/Front Presence R/Subwoofer)
Adjustment
increments
0.2 ft (0.05 m)
J 1 : Enabling “Extra Bass” allows both the subwoofer and the front speakers to
produce bass audio.
J 2 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set
the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less).
En
86
SETUP
MAIN
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Parametric EQ
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric
equalizer.
AUDIO
AV
1
2
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
PEQ Select
Select an equalizer type.
DOCK
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
Manual
Manually adjust equalizer sound.
Flat
Adjust individual speakers to achieve the
same characteristics. Select this option if
speakers offer the same quality.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
Front
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
Adjust individual speakers to achieve the
same characteristics as the front left and
right speakers. Select this option if front
left and right speakers offer significantly
greater quality than other speakers.
DISPLAY
Natural
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
Through (Default)
Disable the equalizer.
PEQ Data Copy
Select 1 of the 3 parametric equalizer types acquired with
automatic setup and manually copy that information to the
manual adjustments.
Flat > Manual
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
Adjust all speakers to achieve a natural
sound. Select this if high-frequency
sounds seem too strong when “PEQ
Select” is set to “Flat.”
Copy the “Flat” parametric equalizer
information acquired with automatic
setup.
Front > Manual
Copy the “Front” parametric equalizer
information acquired with automatic
setup.
Natural > Manual
Copy the “Natural” parametric equalizer
information acquired with automatic
setup.
Front L / Front R / Center / Surround L / Surround R /
Surround Back L / Surround Back R / Front Presence L /
Front Presence R
The parametric equalizer can be used to manually adjust
sound quality for individual speakers.
Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” and use “PEQ Data
Copy” to copy information acquired with automatic
setup. This information can be used as a basis for
performing manual adjustments.
1
Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Band / Gain,” “Freq. / Gain,” or “Q / Gain”
and press kENTER.
2
Use kCursor D / E repeatedly to adjust the
parameter and use kCursor B / C
repeatedly to adjust the gain.
3
4
Press kENTER to exit the edit window.
Test Tone
Turns the test tone generator on or off.
Off (Default)
Does not generate test tones.
On
Generates test tones. While “On” is
selected, test tones are produced
constantly.
You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances.
For example, you can adjust the volume balance
settings for each speaker, or whenever you adjust the
settings on the internal parametric equalizer, you can
listen to the actual effect while operating this unit.
Turn the test tone off when you have finished making
adjustments.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to configure other
parameters.
To reset all parameter settings for the selected
speaker, select “Reset to Flat” and press kENTER.
5
Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.
En
87
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Setting the audio output function of this
unit
■ Synchronizing audio/video output
Mode
Selects a compensation method for the delay between audio and
video output.
Auto (Default)
Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for
Dolby Digital and DTS playback.
Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume for this receiver.
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned
on.
Adaptive DSP Level
Adjusts the level of DSP effect in conjunction with the
volume level.
dynamic range
Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync
function).
Sound Setup items
■ Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS
Manual
When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically
adjusts output timing if the TV supports an automatic
lipsync function.
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream
(Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback.
MAX (Default)
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
STD
Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for
regular home use.
MIN/AUTO
(MIN) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low
volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for
bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals.
(AUTO) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby
TrueHD signals based on input signal information.
Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when
the monitor does not support the automatic lipsync
function.
■ Setting the maximum volume
Delay
Adjustable range
0 ms to +250 ms
Default setting
0 ms
Adjustment
increments
1 ms
Max Volume
Specify the maximum volume level so that sound is not too loud.
The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest volume.
Adjustable range
-30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume)
Default setting
+16.5 dB
Adjustment
increments
5.0 dB
En
88
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Setting the startup volume
Setting this unit’s video output function
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When
this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the
receiver last entered standby mode. J1
Adjustable range
Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Default setting
Off
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
Video Setup items
■ Adjusting DSP effect and volume level
Adaptive DSP Level
Automatically adjust the level of DSP effect in conjunction with
the volume level.
Off
Disables automatic adjustment of the level of DSP
effect.
On (Default)
Adjusts the degree of DSP effect in conjunction with
volume level. The higher the volume level, the less the
DSP effect applied. The lower the volume level, the
greater the DSP effect applied.
Analog to Analog
Conversion
Enable or disable video conversion between analog
video jacks.
Processing
Enable or disable adjustment of resolution and aspect
ratio for video signal converted to HDMI video.
• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless
video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080presolution analog video signals are being input (☞p. 115).
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals can not
be output at the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack (☞p. 115).
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks.
• When composite video signals from a VCR are converted into
component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video jacks cannot
be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set
“Analog to Analog Conversion” to “Off.”
■ Analog-to-analog video conversion
Analog to Analog Conversion
Enables or disables video conversion between analog video jacks.
Off
Disables video conversion between analog video
jacks.
On (Default)
Enables video conversion between analog video jacks.
J 1 : When you set “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Initial Volume,” “Max
Volume” has priority.
En
89
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Adjusting resolution and aspect ratio with
conversion of video signal to HDMI
Through (Default)
The aspect ratio of HDMI video signal sources is not
adjusted.
16:9 Normal
Transmits 4:3 aspect ratio video signals to a 16:9 TV
with black bands on either side of the screen.
Processing
Adjust resolution and aspect ratio with conversion of video input to
HDMI video (upscaling).
Off (Default)
Resolution and aspect ratio are not adjusted with
processing.
On
Resolution and aspect ratio are adjusted with
processing.
Setting HDMI functions
Aspect
• The Aspect setting is automatically disabled when “Resolution”
is set to “Through.”
• The Aspect setting is automatically disabled for video input with
aspect ratios other than 4:3.
• Changing the aspect ratio of 720p, 1080i, or 1080p has no effect.
HDMI Setup items
Resolution
Auto (Default)
Automatic upscaling in accordance with TV
resolution.
480p
Upscaling to 480p (576p).
720p
Upscaling to 720p.
1080i
Upscaling to 1080i.
1080p
Upscaling to 1080p.
Through
No upscaling.
• The 720p-, 1080i- and 1080p-resolution video signals cannot be
upscaled (☞p. 115).
• When a TV is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit
automatically detects a resolution that the TV supports. Only the
detected resolution can be selected.
• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the TV supports, set
“MON.CHK” in the Advanced Setup menu to “SKIP” (☞p. 101)
and try again.
HDMI Control
Turns the HDMI Control on or off.
ARC (Audio Return
Channel)
Turns the Audio Return Channel function on or
off.
TV Audio Input
Chooses automatically selected audio input in
conjunction with TV operation when the
HDMI Control is turned on.
Audio Output
Specifies whether or not audio signal is output
through this unit and a TV connected via the
HDMI OUT jack.
Standby Through J1
Turns the Standby Through function on or off.
J 1 : This item appears depending on “HDMI Control.”
En
90
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control)
■ Listening to TV audio via single HDMI
cable (Audio Return Channel)
■ Selecting an input source to assign audio
input for the TV
HDMI Control
Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices
connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components
support HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use
the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s
functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those
devices.
Refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 102) for setting
instructions.
Off (Default)
Sets HDMI Control to “Off.”
On
Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1
If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the
HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate.
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
TV Audio Input
You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function.
When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this
unit via an HDMI cable.
The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source
selected in “TV Audio Input.” J2
By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s
audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the
unit.
Off (Default)
Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.”
On
Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.”
Select the input source that receives audio signals from TV while
the HDMI Control function is on.
When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to
the input source selected here. J2
Audio input
AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2
Default setting
AV4
Refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically
when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 103) for instructions.
When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return
Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display.
TV
AV4
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio
Return Channel function” (☞p. 104) for setting instructions.
J 1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is
automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and
video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be
transmitted to the TV. The HDMI input source can only be changed using the
remote control.
J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input
source cannot be used.
En
91
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Specify whether or not audio signal is
output through this unit and a TV
Audio Output
■ Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV
during standby mode (Standby Through)
Setting this unit’s multi-zone function
Standby Through
Choose whether audio is played back through this unit or through a
TV.
Amp
Specify whether or not audio signal is output through this unit.
Off
Audio is not output through this unit.
On (Default)
Audio is output through this unit. When this setting is
selected, audio from the external component is output
in a format compatible with this unit.
OUT
Specify whether or not audio signal is output through a TV
connected via the HDMI OUT jack.
Off (Default)
Audio is not output through a TV connected via the
HDMI OUT jack.
On
Outputs audio through a TV connected via the HDMI
OUT jack. When this setting is selected, audio from
the external component is output in a format
compatible with the TV.
This function allows audio/video signals from HDMI inputs to
continue to be transmitted to a TV when this unit is in standby
mode.
When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals
continue to be output to the TV from the last HDMI input source
before this unit enters standby mode. The HDMI input source can be
selected using dHDMI1-5 or dV-AUX in standby mode.
Multi Zone Setup item
Off (Default)
Sets Standby Through to “Off.”
On
Transmits audio/video signals from the selected
HDMI input source to the TV.
• When “HDMI Control” is “On,” Standby Through function is
automatically enabled and “Standby Through” is not displayed.
• When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/
iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby
mode. This unit consumes approximately 3 W of power.
Zone2 Set
Adjusts Zone2 volume level.
■ Adjusting Zone2 volume
Zone2 Set
Max Volume
Specify the maximum volume level in Zone2 so that sound is not
too loud.
Adjustable range
-30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume)
Default setting
+16.5 dB
Adjustment
increments
5.0 dB
Initial Volume
Specify the initial volume level in Zone2 when this unit is turned on.
Adjustable range
Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Default setting
Off
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
En
92
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Making the receiver easier to use
■ Goes enter standby mode automatically
when you leave it without operating
■ Specifying menu display
Display Set
Auto Power Down
Specify front panel display brightness and TV screen wall paper.
If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an
extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode
(Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is
“Off.” When you want to enable this function, set the amount of
time to pass before this unit will enter standby.
4hours
Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for four hours.
8hours
Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for eight hours.
12hours
Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for twelve hours.
Off (Default)
Auto Power Down function is disabled.
Function Setup items
Auto Power Down
This unit enters standby mode if no operations are
performed.
Display Set
Specifies menu items displayed on TV screen and the
front panel.
Trigger Output
Specifies TRIGGER OUT jack function.
Memory Guard
Protects some settings against accidental
modification.
This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the
standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the
countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the
timer.
Front Panel Display
Specify front panel display brightness and message scroll pattern.
Dimmer
Adjustable range: -4 - 0
Reduce brightness of the front panel display. As the
value is lowered, the panel display darkens.
Scroll
Selects the manner in which display scrolls when the
total number of characters exceeds the display area on
the front panel display.
Select “Continue” for continuous scrolling of all
characters.
Select “Once” to scroll through all characters once
and then halt scrolling for display of only the first 14
characters.
Wall Paper
Specify the wall paper displayed on the TV screen when no video
signal is input. Select one that you prefer.
Picture
Displays an image on the TV screen when there is no
video signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when
there is no video signal.
En
93
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Setting TRIGGER OUT functions
All
Trigger Output
Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function synchronized with power
status of each zone or input switching.
Trigger Mode
Specify the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Power (Default)
Source
Manual
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized
with the power status of the zone specified with
“Target Zone.”
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized
with the input switching in the zone specified with
“Target Zone.”
Electronic signal is transmitted according to the
setting made in “Target Source.”
Select this to manually switch the output level for
electronic signal transmission with “Manual.”
Target Zone
Specify the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions
synchronized.
Main (Default)
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with power status
of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with input
switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with power status
of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with input
switching in Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with power status
of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with input
switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Target Source
Specify the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with
each input switching.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you
switch to the input source specified in this option.
High (Default)
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the
input source specified in this option.
■ Prohibiting setting changes
Memory Guard
Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made
to the settings on Setup menu.
Off (Default)
Settings are not protected.
On
Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until
it is returned to “Off.”
While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory
Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the
settings.
Language
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Source.”
Manual
Manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission.
This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the
external component connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High (Default)
Transmits the electronic signal.
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Manual.”
Select the language used for display of menus and messages. J1
Choices: English (English),
(Japanese),
(French),
(German),
(Spanish),
(Russian)
J 1 : Content window information is displayed in the language in which that
information was released.
En
94
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
Confirming information of this unit (Information menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
A variety of information for this unit can be displayed.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Selecting information
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
Press jON SCREEN.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
Displays information on the current video signal.
Format
Signal format. When this unit is unable to
detect a digital signal, it automatically
switches to analog input.
Sampling
The number of samples taken per second
from a continuous signal to make a
discrete signal.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
TV
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
Channel
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
The number of source channels in the
input signal (front/surround/LFE). For
example, a multi-channel soundtrack with
3 front channels, 2 surround channels and
LFE is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
HDMI signal
Source video signal type and video signal
output to this unit’s HDMI OUT jack.
HDMI Resolution
Input signal (analog or HDMI) and output
signal (HDMI) resolution.
Analog Resolution
Resolution of the source video signal and
the analog video signal output to this
unit’s COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
jacks.
HDMI Error
Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices (☞p. 107).
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■ Video information
Displays information on the current audio signal.
MUSIC
SLEEP
BD
DVD
■ Audio information
0
10
2
Use kCursor B / C to select “Information”
and press kENTER.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
3
Use kCursor D / E to select an Information
menu and press kENTER.
Bitrate
The number of bits passing a given point
per second.
■ HDMI monitor
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level preset
to the current input bitstream signal.
Displays information on the TV screen connected to this
unit’s HDMI OUT jack.
• “___” is displayed when this unit cannot display the
corresponding information.
• Some high-definition audio bitstream contents may not
include the discrete surround back left and right
channel signals, but are encoded at a bitrate of 192
kHz.
• Even when direct bitstream output settings are applied,
some players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby
Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams,
while converting DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio bitstreams to DTS bitstreams.
Interface
Displays information on the current
connection interface.
Video Resolution
Displays the frequency for each video
resolution of the TV currently connected.
■ System information
Displays information on the current settings of “Remote
ID,” “TV Format” and “Speaker Impedance.”
■ Zone information
Displays information on Zone2 settings.
En
95
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
c
q
You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code).
The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
AV
1
2
6
MULTI
SIRIUS
[ A ]
5
TUNER
Controlling other components with the remote control
d Selecting input source connected to DVD
player
DOCK
Selecting input source connected to CD
player
Keys connecting external
components
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
DVD player
DVD player
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
Playback/Stop
RADIO
Playback/Stop
OPTION
ON SCREEN
CD player
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
If you are unable to operate this unit after operating
an external component, light up
qSOURCE/RECEIVER in orange by pressing it,
and then try operating the remote control again.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
P
MENU
MUTE
l
REC
HOLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
CD player
m
10
TV VOL
TV CH
cSOURCE A
Switches an external component on and off.
kCursor, kENTER, kRETURN
Operates the menus of external components.
lDISPLAY
Switches an external component display.
lExternal component operation keys
Functions as a recording or playback key of an external
component, or a menu display key.
mNumeric keys
Functions as numeric keys of an external component.
ENT
TV
INPUT
MUTE
The remote control keys for controlling external
components are available only when the external
components have corresponding control keys.
n
nTV control keys J1
c SOURCE A
d Input selector
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
l External component
nINPUT
Switches video inputs of TV.
nMUTE
Mutes TV volume temporarily.
nTV VOL +/-
Controls the volume of TV.
nTV CH +/-
Switches TV channels.
nA
Turns on and off TV.
operation keys
l DISPLAY
m Numeric keys
n TV control keys
n INPUT
n MUTE
n TV VOL +/n TV CH +/nA
q SOURCE/RECEIVER
J 1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to
dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in nA
(nTV control keys).
To register a TV remote control code to dInput selector:
You can use the kCursor, mNumeric keys, and nTV
To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to
dInput selector:
You can use the kCursor and mNumeric keys etc to control
external components, and the nTV control keys to control
TVs registered in nA.
control keys to control a TV you have registered.
En
96
SETUP
MAIN
Controlling other components with the remote control
ZONE 2
CODE SET
o
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
d
Default remote control code
settings
Registering remote control codes
for external component operations
The following remote control codes are assigned to input
sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “Remote Control
Code Search” in the CD-ROM.
The following section describes how to register remote
control code using an example of the registration of the
remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected
to HDMI2 jack.
AUDIO
AV
1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
TUN./CH
Manufacturer
Remote
control code
Blu-ray player/
recorder
Yamaha
2064
HDMI2
—
—
—
HDMI3
—
—
—
HDMI4
—
—
—
HDMI5
—
—
—
AV1
—
—
—
AV2
—
—
—
AV3
CD player
Yamaha
5095
AV4
—
—
—
AV5
—
—
—
AV6
—
—
—
AUDIO1
—
—
—
AUDIO2
—
—
—
V-AUX
—
—
—
A J1
—
—
—
DOCK
—
—
—
TUNER
—
—
—
SIRIUS
—
—
—
Input
Category
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MUSIC
SLEEP
HDMI1
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
Press oCODE SET using a pointed object
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.
blinks twice
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
PRESET
MOVIE
2
TV CH
MUTE
d HDMI2
n TV control keys
nA
o CODE SET
n
J 1 : Use A for external component operations only. Set these keys to
remote control codes if you want to perform external component
operations without linking to input source selection of this unit.
For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes
for devices such as TVs.
• Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1
minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
from step 2.
• Remote control code of an external component cannot
be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use
“Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to
search the available remote control codes from the
category or manufacturer of external components.
• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first
code in the list, if it does not work then try the other
codes.
1
HDMI
1
3
2
3
4
Press dHDMI2 to switch the input source to
HDMI2. J2
Perform the following steps to register the selected
input source here to the remote control code.
Continues to the
next page
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CDROM to search the available remote control
codes from the category or manufacturer of
external components.
“2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player.
J 2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the
nTV control keys, press nA (nTV control keys) in step
3.
En
97
SETUP
MAIN
Controlling other components with the remote control
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
o
q
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
d
AUDIO
4
Enter a remote control code “2064” using
mNumeric keys. J1
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
2
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
3
Enter “9981” using mNumeric keys.
9
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1
minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
from step 1.
8
9
1
Once the remote control code is reset successfully
qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
Reset successful: blinks twice
Reset failed: blinks 6 times
MUSIC
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
Resetting all remote control codes for external
components to the initial factory settings.
4
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
CATEGORY
FM
6
0
Resetting all remote control codes
TV
CD
RADIO
ZONE 2
i
1
Press oCODE SET using a pointed object
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
SOURCE RECEIVER
OPTION
ON SCREEN
CODE SET
blinks twice
HDMI
HDMI
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
1
2
3
1
4
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
m
MUTE
d HDMI2
i SCENE
m Numeric keys
o CODE SET
q SOURCE/RECEIVER
5
CODE SET
3
4
If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
ENT
INPUT
ZONE 2
• If the registration fails, repeat from step 2.
• In case of an external component with multiple remote
control codes, the other remote control codes may be
supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote
control codes.
2
2
3
4
Press qSOURCE/RECEIVER on the remote
control.
To switch between BD player linked to
scene selections, press iSCENE and at the
same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for
approximately 3 seconds.
Then you can operate the external components by
switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting
HDMI2 in the registered scene.
Same steps for operating other external components,
press iSCENE and at the same time press the input
source key selected in step 3 and hold it for
approximately 3 seconds.
J 1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the
nTV control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4.
En
98
SETUP
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows.
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup
menu
3
Use PROGRAM l / h to select the item to be set
from the following items.
Setting the impedance of speakers
In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings.
1
2
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
SP IMP.
Sets the impedance of speakers.
REMOTE ID
Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.
Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding
STRAIGHT on the front panel.
SR PIN
Resets the parental lock code for the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio tuner.
Release STRAIGHT when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed
on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed.
TV FORMAT
Specifies the TV’s color encoding format.
MON.CHK
Removes the up-scaling limitation on HDMI video
output.
INIT
Initializes various settings for this unit.
SPIMP.-8MIN
Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected. J1
6ΩMIN
Select the impedance when 6 Ω speakers are
connected.
8ΩMIN (Default)
Select the impedance when speakers above 8 Ω are
connected.
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE A
MAIN ZONE
YPAO MIC
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
SCENE
BD
DVD
PHONES
INPUT
TONE CONTROL
TV
CD
PROGRAM
RADIO
STRAIGHT
4
5
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you
want to change.
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
switch it on again.
The settings become effective and the unit is powered on.
SILENT CINEMA
PROGRAM l / h
J 1 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “Changing
speaker impedance” (☞p. 18).
En
99
SETUP
MAIN
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
o
q
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
AUDIO
2
Avoiding crossing remote control
signals when using multiple
Yamaha receivers
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
REMOTEID-ID1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
The remote control of the unit can only receive signals
from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote
control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers,
you can set each remote control with a unique remote
control ID for its corresponding receiver.
On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote
control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote
control to operate 2 receivers.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
ID1 (Default)
REC
ID2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
m
Receives the remote control signals set in
ID1.
Receives the remote control signals set in
ID2.
■ To change the remote control ID
Resetting the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ parental lock code
Perform each of the following steps within
1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if
more than 1 minute passes since the last operation.
To reset, repeat from step 1.
1
2
3
Press oCODE SET using a pointed
object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.
Press qSOURCE/RECEIVER.
Enter the desired remote control ID code.
SRPIN-CANCEL
Reset the SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock code to
the factory default setting.
RESET
Resets the code to the factory default
setting.
CANCEL (Default)
Cancels resetting of the parental lock
code.
To switch to ID1:
Enter “5019” using mNumeric keys.
To switch to ID2:
Enter “5020” using mNumeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by
default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the
remote control ID for both remote control and
receiver.
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
m Numeric keys
o CODE SET
q SOURCE/RECEIVER
1
2
3
4
• If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
• Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is
initialized (☞p. 98).
En
100
SETUP
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
Changing TV format
Initializing various settings for this unit
TVFORMAT-NTSC
INIT- CANCEL
Change the color encoding format of OSD to PAL or NTSC
(default), to match the format used by the TV connected via the
HDMI OUT or VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.
Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it back to
default.
Select the items to be initialized from the following.
Removing HDMI video output up-scaling
limits
DSP PARAM
Initializes all parameters for the sound programs.
VIDEO
Resets video conversion settings (resolution/aspect
ratio) in the Setup menu.
ALL
Resets this unit to default factory settings.
CANCEL (Default)
Does not initialize.
MON.CHK-YES
Removes the up-scaling limitation on video resolution when this
unit and a TV are connected via HDMI jacks.
If a resolution supported by the monitor cannot be detected when
configuring the up-scaling settings, this setting will remove the
output limitation.
YES (Default)
Video output signals of a resolution not supported by
the TV will not be transmitted.
SKIP
This unit ignores the TV’s support capability and
transmits input video signals to the TV.
When an option other than CANCEL is selected, the applicable
default settings will be restored when the unit switches to
standby mode.
En
101
SETUP
Using the HDMI Control function
This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to
operate external components via HDMI. If devices that support
HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link-compatible TVs,
DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) are connected J1, remote
controls for those devices can be used to perform the following
operations:
– Power synchronization (on/standby)
– Volume control, including Mute
– Changing the audio signal output device (either the TV or this
unit)
1
2
3
Connect the TV that supports the HDMI Control
function to this unit’s HDMI output jack.
4
Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to
“On.”
8
If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control
function are connected to this unit, turn them on.
Connect the DVD recorder that supports the HDMI
Control function to this unit’s HDMI input jack.
Receiver unit
Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder
has been selected. If a different input source has been
selected, change it manually.
Turn on the TV and this unit.
TV/DVD Recorder
Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is
being properly received by the TV.
Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external
components.
Operations 1-8 will not be required more than twice.
TV
Control signal
(such as volume control)
HDMI connection
Receiver unit
Confirm that “HDMI Control” in the Setup menu
(HDMI Setup) is set to “On” (☞p. 91). J2
TV/DVD Recorder
Check the instruction manuals for those devices.
HDMI
Remote control of TV
5
Turn the TV off.
6
Turn the TV on.
7
Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that
is connected to this unit (e.g., HDMI1).
Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the
TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually.
This unit
NOTE
The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV,
and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and
DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below.
Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If
it is still off, turn it on manually.
9
Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with
the TV through the following operations by using the
TV remote control.
• Power On/Off
• Volume Control
• Switching between audio output devices
If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations,
check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both
devices.
If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and replugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the
problem.
– Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On”
– Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect
this unit to the TV
J 1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same
manufacturer whenever possible.
J 2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.”
En
102
SETUP
MAIN
Using the HDMI Control function
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Switching the input source on this
SOURCE RECEIVER
unit automatically when listening
to TV audio
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
AUDIO
When the HDMI Control (☞p. 102) is operating
properly, the input source of this unit is automatically
changed to match operations carried out on the TV. The
default input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack
is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can
enjoy TV sound through this unit right away.
AV
TUNER
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUN./CH
TV output jack
Input jack
Optical digital audio output
AV1 or AV4 (Default)
Coaxial digital audio output
AV2 or AV3
Analog stereo output
AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2
5
Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select
“HDMI” and press kENTER.
6
Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On.”
7
8
9
Press kCursor C to select “TV Audio
Input” and press kENTER.
Available input jacks
ARC
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
TV
CD
j
FM
SIRIUS
ARC
FM
SIRIUS
75
PB
GND AM
PR
+12V
0.1A MAX.
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
OPTICAL
Y
VOLUME
k
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
AV
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURR
TRIG
When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press
kENTER and kCursor B / C to set to “On.”
TV
O
DISPLAY
POP-UP
MENU
SURROU
VIDEO
Y
RE
VIDEO
TOP
MENU
HDMI 5
PB
VIDEO
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
ENTER
CENTER
IN
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PB
RETURN
HDMI 4
REMOTE
PR
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
O
PR
HDMI 3
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
GND AM
OUT
OPTICAL
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Audio output
(Optical)
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
SCENE
BD
DVD
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
SURROU
AUDIO 2
MUL
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry
out the following procedure.
1
2
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
cable.
Connect TV’s audio output to this unit.
The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s
audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the
TV.
3
4
Press jON SCREEN. J1
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Setup” and press kENTER.
Use kCursor B / C to select the input jack
connected in step 2.
Press jON SCREEN when you have
finished changing the settings.
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this
unit will automatically switch to the input source
chosen in step 7.
J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 83)
for details on the Setup menu.
En
103
SETUP
MAIN
Using the HDMI Control function
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Single HDMI cable input to TV
SOURCE RECEIVER
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
2
4
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
AUDIO
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
j
SCENE
BD
DVD
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Setup” and press kENTER.
When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and
Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output
from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to
this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable
(Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals
transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to
any input source.
AV
1
3
audio with Audio Return Channel
function
HDMI
TV
CD
RADIO
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
cable.
1
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
4
Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select
“HDMI” and press kENTER.
HDMI
POP-UP
MENU
HDMI
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Video / Audio
output
8
9
Press kCursor C to select “ARC (Audio
Return Channel)” and press kENTER. J2
Press kCursor B / C to select the input
source to which the HDMI audio signals will
be assigned, and press kRETURN.
Press kCursor C to select “On.”
The Audio Return Channel function will turn on.
Press jON SCREEN to close the Setup
menu.
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals,
this unit will automatically switch to the input
source chosen in step 6.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
Press kCursor C to select “TV Audio
Input” and press kENTER.
10
TV
k
6
7
TV audio
output
HDMI
ENT
INPUT
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
MUTE
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
NT
FM
HDMI 3
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI 4
CENTER
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
5
Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On.”
When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press
kENTER and kCursor B / C to set to “On.”
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
2
VIDEO
Press jON SCREEN. J1
J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 83)
for details on the Setup menu.
J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected
for the input source cannot be used.
En
104
SETUP
Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can
control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control.
From the ZONE2 OUT jacks
■ Using the external amplifier
An amplifier located in the secondary zone can be connected to this unit as shown below.
Audio input
Amplifier
Main zone
SPEAKERS
AUDIO
Second zone
(Zone2)
L
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
FRONT
R
HDMI 5
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
DVD player (etc.)
SINGLE
EXTRA SP
Remote control
This unit
Infrared signal
emitter
From the REMOTE OUT jack
ZONE2/
PRESENCE
Amplifier
NTER
Infrared signal
receiver
Second Zone
(Zone2)
SINGLE
CENTER
L
R
WOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
1 SUBWOOFER 2
To the REMOTE IN jack
Only analog signal can be sent to Zone2. If you want to output sound from Zone2, connect an
external component to AV5-6, AUDIO1-2, or VIDEO AUX by analog connection. For example, if
you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player in Zone2, you must connect the component to
this unit by both HDMI and analog connections.
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP jacks directly (☞p. 18).
Connecting Zone2
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks for multi-zone components
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
This unit is equipped with REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use these jacks to control
this unit and other components from Zone2 (☞p. 30).
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control
to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the
Zone2 connections that best meet your requirements.
Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. These models
may not require an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown
below.
REMOTE
IN
Infrared signal
receiver
REMOTE
OUT
IN
This unit
REMOTE
OUT
Yamaha
component
En
105
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Using multi-zone configuration
b
p
Controlling Zone2
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
The remote control can be used to select and control
Zone2 devices. The available operations are as follows:
AUDIO
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
[ A ]
TUNER
• Selecting the input source of Zone2.
d • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
MUTE
b MAIN/ZONE2
d Input selector
h SLEEP
p RECEIVER A
Set bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 before attempting to
use the remote control to control Zone2 devices.
■ Operating Zone2
To switch between on and standby for Zone2
Press pRECEIVER A.
REC
INPUT
■ Activating the Zone2 operation
mode
OPTION
ON SCREEN
h
input source of Zone2.
• Tuning into SIRIUS Satellite Radio when “SIRIUS” is
selected as the input source of Zone2.
• Adjust the volume of Zone2 devices (when connected via
the built-in amplifier).
To select an input source for Zone2
Press dInput selector.
ENT
To enable the sleep timer for Zone2
Automatically switch the Zone2 device to standby mode
after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer).
Press hSLEEP repeatedly to specify a time for the
sleep timer function.
Sleep 120min.
Sleep Off
Sleep 90min.
Sleep 30min.
Sleep 60min.
En
106
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
General
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The power will not
turn on.
The protection circuitry operated
3 times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, when the protection
circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the
capability to turn on the power is disabled.
Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or
service center to request repair.
—
The unit enters
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not completely
inserted.
Connect the power cable properly to an AC
wall outlet.
—
(When this unit is turned back on
and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is
displayed.) The protection
circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on
while a speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between
this unit and speakers are connected
properly.
19
The internal microcomputer is
hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or
excessive static electricity) or by a
drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC
wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then
plug it in again.
—
The batteries in the remote control
may have lost their charge.
Replace all batteries.
The protection circuitry has been
activated because of a short circuit,
etc.
This unit cannot be
turned off or does
not work properly.
The unit enters
standby mode.
The sleep timer has turned off the
unit.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
After display of a
countdown on the
front panel, the unit
goes into standby
mode.
If you do not use take any action,
the Auto Power Down function
operates.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again.
—
In the Setup menu “Auto Power Down”
(“Function” → “Auto Power Down”),
increase the time until switching to standby
mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down
function.
93
No sound.
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
25
Speaker connections are not
secure.
Secure the connections.
19
The HDMI components connected
to the unit do not support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
—
The audio input into the device is
set to playback through the TV.
In the Setup menu, set the “Amp” of “Audio
Output” (“HDMI” → “Audio Output” →
“Amp”) to “On.”
92
No appropriate input source has
been selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
Input selector.
40
7
—
—
The volume is turned down or
muted.
Turn up the volume.
Check that the speaker with an impedance
of at least 6 Ω.
18
Use an input source that has signals that can
be reproduced on this unit.
Check that the speaker wires are not
touching each other, then turn the unit back
on.
—
Signals that this unit cannot
reproduce are being input from a
source component, such as a CDROM.
—
Check that the speaker impedance settings
are correct.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again.
—
En
107
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Problem
No picture.
No sound is output
from a specific
speaker.
See
page
Cause
Remedy
The video signal output from this
unit is not supported by a monitor
connected to this unit via the
HDMI OUT jack.
Displays the Advanced Setup menu and
select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video
parameters.
101
Displays the Advanced Setup menu and set
“MON.CHK” to “YES.”
101
An appropriate video input is not
selected on the TV.
Select an appropriate video input on the TV.
—
The speaker is malfunctioning.
Check the Speaker indicators on
the front panel display. If the
corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check
if sound is output.
If sound is not output, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
10
The playback component or
speakers are not connected
properly.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
19, 25
Output from that speaker is
disabled.
Check the Speaker indicators on the front
panel display. If the corresponding indicator
is turned off, try the following.
1) Change to a different input source.
2) With the selected sound program, sound
is not output from that speaker. Select
another sound program.
3) “None” may have been selected for that
speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker” in
the Setup menu, and set respective
parameters to enable output from that
speaker (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” →
“Configuration”).
10, 84
The volume of that speaker is set
to the minimum in “Speaker” in
the Setup menu.
Display “Speaker” in the Setup menu and
adjust the volume (“Speaker” → “Manual
Setup” → “Level”).
86
(If hardly any sound comes from
one channel)
Speaker output balance is not set
correctly.
Balance the volume of each speaker from
“Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker” →
“Manual Setup” → “Level”).
86
Sound may not be output from
certain channels, depending on the
input source or sound program.
Try another sound program.
41
Problem
Cause
See
page
Remedy
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When a monaural source sound
program is applied, for some
surround decoders, sound from all
channels is output from the center
speaker.
Try another sound program.
41
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
This unit is in straight decoding
mode and a monaural source is
being played back.
Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding
mode.
42
Sound may not be output from
certain channels depending on
input sources or sound programs.
Try another sound program.
41
This unit is in straight decoding
mode and a monaural source is
being played back.
Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding
mode.
42
Sound may not be output from
certain channels depending on
input sources or sound programs.
Try another sound program.
41
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“Extended Surround” in the
OPTION menu is set to “OFF,” or
an input signal does not contain a
surround back flag with “Extended
Surround” set to “Auto.”
Set “Extended Surround” other than “OFF”
or “Auto.”
51
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
A subwoofer is not connected, or it
is inactive.
Check that a subwoofer is connected
correctly, and from the Setup menu
“Subwoofer” (“Speaker” → “Manual
Setup” → “Configuration” →
“Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to “Use.”
20, 86
The subwoofer is turned off.
Turn the subwoofer power on.
If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power
Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off
sensitivity settings.
—
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
The source does not contain LFE
(☞p. 114) or low frequency
signals.
The right
combination of audio
/ video jacks to
connect cannot be
found.
Combine input connected to the
external component video output
with another input audio jack.
—
Display the Input menu for the connected
video output, select “Audio In” and select
the jack to use for audio input.
En
74
108
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format.
The connected component is not
set to output the desired digital
audio signals.
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency
equipment.
This unit is too close to other
digital or radio frequency
equipment.
Noise/hum noise is
heard.
Incorrect cable connection.
Connect the audio cables properly.
If the problem persists, the cables may be
defective.
—
A DTS-CD is being played back.
1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly
input to this unit, only noise is output.
Connect the playback component to this
unit by digital connection and playback the
DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,
the problem may results from the playback
component. Consult the manufacturer of the
playback component.
2) When noise is output during playback or
skip operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display
the Input menu after selecting the input
source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.”
—
The component connected to the
output jacks of this unit is not
turned on.
When the component connected to the
output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the
sound may be distorted, or the volume may
decreased due to the nature of AV receivers.
Turn on all components connected to this
unit.
—
“Max Volume” is set to a low
value.
Set it to a higher value.
88
The volume cannot
be increased, or the
sound is distorted.
Set the playback component properly
referring to its instruction manual.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
HDMI™
—
Problem
—
Cause
See
page
Remedy
The front panel
display HDMI
indicator is flashing.
An error with the HDMI
connection has occurred.
Try re-inserting the HDMI cable.
—
Confirm that HDMI video that is not
supported by the unit is not being input
(Information menu → “Video
information”).
95
No picture or sound.
The number of components is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI components.
—
The connected HDMI component
does not support high-bandwidth
digital copyright protection
(HDCP).
Connect an HDMI component that supports
HDCP.
—
The TV audio output is not
connected to this unit, or the
setting to match operations carried
out on TV is not set.
Connect the TV audio output to this unit,
and then select the connected input source
in “TV Audio Input” (Setup menu → HDMI
→ TV Audio Input).
91
(When using Audio Return
Channel function)
The Audio Return Channel
function is not working.
Make sure that your TV supports Audio
Return Channel.
Set the Audio Return Channel function to
on (Setup menu → HDMI → ARC (Audio
Return Channel)).
91
(When using HDMI
Control function)
TV sound is not
output from this unit
when operating the
remote control of the
TV.
En
109
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Tuner (FM/AM)
Problem
FM
Problem
FM stereo reception
is noisy.
Cause
You are too far from the station
transmitter, or the input from the
antenna is weak.
Remedy
See
page
Check the antenna connections.
32
Switch to monaural mode.
56
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi-element antenna.
—
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or
place it in a different location.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
You are in an area far from a
station, or input from the antenna
is weak.
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi element antenna.
—
Use TUN./CH H / I to manually select the
station.
54
“No Presets” is
displayed.
No preset stations are registered.
Register stations you want to listen to as
preset stations before operation.
54
“Wrong Station” is
displayed.
An invalid FM/AM frequency has
been input.
Input a frequency that can be received.
—
The supplied AM loop antenna is
not connected.
Connect the AM loop antenna correctly
even if you use an outdoor antenna.
32
The noises may be caused by
lightning, fluorescent lamps,
motors, thermostats, or other
electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,
but it can be reduced by installing and
properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.
32
Buzzing and whining
noises are heard.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio information is
not displayed
properly.
Display
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak, or the antenna
connections are loose.
Automatic station
preset does not
work.
Automatic station preset is not
available for AM stations.
Remedy
32
Use the manual tuning method.
54
Use manual station preset.
The hold function is enabled.
Cause
See
page
Remedy
Press HOLD to disable the hold function.
63
See
page
Remedy
The antenna is not connected to
the SiriusConnect tuner properly.
Check the connection of the antenna and
SiriusConnect tuner.
58
SIRIUS LOADING
This unit is communicating with
the SiriusConnect tuner.
The message disappears normally within
several tens of seconds.
—
CHECK SR TUNER
The SiriusConnect tuner is not
connected to the SIRIUS jack of
this unit correctly.
Check the connection of the SiriusConnect
tuner and this unit.
58
The SiriusConnect tuner is not
connected to the AC wall outlet.
Connect the power cable of the
SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet.
—
This unit does not support the
connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio
tuner.
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this
unit supports,
—
See
page
Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation.
Cause
ANTENNA ERROR
AM
Cause
See
page
Remedy
Continuous
crackling and
hissing noises are
heard.
Problem
Problem
Cause
54
NOT SUPPORTED
En
110
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Display
ACQUIRING
UPDATING
Cause
The signal is too weak.
Remedy
Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the
SiriusConnect tuner. Check the antenna
reception level from the Antenna
information on the front panel display, or
the SIRIUS Information screen on the TV
screen.
See
page
62, 63
Display
Loading...
The SiriusConnect tuner is
updating the channel list.
Wait until the updating is complete.
—
The period of the subscription is
end.
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the
subscription.
—
F/W UPDATING
The SiriusConnect tuner is
updating the firmware.
Wait until the updating is complete.
—
CALL SIRIUS
(CALL 888-539SIRIUS TO
SUBSCRIBE)
The selected channel is not
subscribed.
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe
the selected channel.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-5397474)
—
Select another channel.
59
Use Numeric keys to enter the 4-digit code,
select OK and then press ENT.
64
Reset the SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental
lock code to the factory default setting.
100
Select another channel.
59
SUB UPDATED
The subscription information is
updated.
LOCK
The parental lock function is
enabled.
INVALID
The selected channel is currently
out of service.
Not Available
The operation you made is not
available.
iPod™/iPhone™
Connect error
Cause
See
page
Remedy
The unit is in the process of
recognizing the connection with
your iPod/iPhone.
—
The unit is in the middle of
acquiring song lists from your
iPod/iPhone.
—
There is a problem with the signal
path from your iPod/iPhone to the
unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha
iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of
the unit.
65
Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha
iPod universal dock and then place it back in
the dock.
65
Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the
unit.
—
Unknown iPod
The iPod/iPhone being used is not
supported by the unit.
iPod connected
Your iPod/iPhone is properly
placed in the Yamaha iPod
universal dock.
—
Your iPod/iPhone is properly
placed in the Yamaha iPod
wireless transmitter and connected
with this unit via wireless
transmission.
68
Your iPod/iPhone is removed from
the Yamaha iPod universal dock.
—
Your iPod/iPhone is disconnected
with this unit via wireless
transmission.
—
Disconnected
Unable to play
The unit cannot playback the
songs currently stored on your
iPod/iPhone.
Check that songs are currently stored on
your iPod/iPhone.
En
—
111
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Bluetooth™
Display
Searching...
Remote control
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and the Bluetooth
component are in the process of
pairing.
—
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and the Bluetooth
component are in the process of
establishing a connection.
—
Completed
The pairing is completed.
—
Canceled
The pairing is canceled.
—
BT connected
The connection between the
Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver and the Bluetooth
component is established.
—
The Bluetooth component is
disconnected from the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
—
Disconnected
Not found
The Bluetooth component is not
found.
Pairing may not have been
achieved.
During pairing:
– pairing must be performed on the
Bluetooth component and this unit
simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth
component is in pairing mode.
During connecting:
– check if the Bluetooth component is
turned on.
– check if the Bluetooth component is
within 10 m (32 feet) of the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
—
Try pairing again.
70
Problem
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
External components
cannot be controlled
using the remote
control.
Cause
See
page
Remedy
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m / 20 ft, and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
—
Direct sunlight or lighting (from
an inverter type of fluorescent
lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking
the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this
unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
7
The remote control ID of the
remote control and this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and
the remote control.
97
The remote control code is not
correctly set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“Remote control code search” on the CDROM.
—
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer using “Remote control code
search” on the CD-ROM.
—
If this unit does not work when you press
Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following.
When the key does not work during DVD
disc menu operation: press the Input
selector again.
When there is no response with remote
control operation of the OPTION menu/
Setup menu: press SOURCE/RECEIVER
(it should glow orange) and try operating the
remote control again.
—
—
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some
models that do not respond to the
remote control.
En
112
APPENDIX
Glossary
Audio information
Audio and video synchronization (Lipsync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that
involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video
signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user
adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video
syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization
automatically and accurately without user interaction.
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One
amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the
other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this
arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This
restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each
amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely
independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and
center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range
audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects,
referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic
range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5
full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using
digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement
and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a
5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers
of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete
5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel,
and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel
for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and
“Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DTS Digital Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel
playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes
available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources.
DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of
movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining
popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural
spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system
produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left,
right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as
a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES
decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back
channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce
realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo),
a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special
sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a
narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all
video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts.
The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal
processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel
to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for
high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby
TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel
sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS
decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical
48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers
sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray
discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the
case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling
you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while
playing the main program.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc.
Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering
a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master
Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the
optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD
Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
En
113
APPENDIX
Glossary
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital
storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as
single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common
occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the
PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or
higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can
transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency
range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only
enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by
the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback
by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels
with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are
two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode”
for movie sources.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is
used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses
a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of
time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded
as pulses and then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is
sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of
accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the
number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is
determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of
quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.
Sound program information
Video information
CINEMA DSP
Component video signal
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for
use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many
speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as
room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so
widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses
Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby
Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie
theater in the listening room of your own home.
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into
the Y signal for luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance.
Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of
these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color
signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output
component signals.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression
artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound
system.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the
three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component
transmits these three elements combined.
Deep Color
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for
headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be
enjoyed on headphones.
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the
24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit
depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to
billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast
ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
HDMI
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you
to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a
center speaker.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry
supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an
interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and
audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital
audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate
future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the
security requirements of content providers and system operators. For
further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://
www.hdmi.org/.”
SILENT CINEMA
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the
height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the
reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates
the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
En
114
APPENDIX
Glossary
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that
were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color
gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can
thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still
pictures and computer graphics.
Video conversion
Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is performed according to resolution of video signals as shown below. Analog-to-analog video conversion is also possible when “Analog to Analog Conversion” is
set to “On” (☞p. 89).
✓:
HDMI output
HDMI input
COMPONENT VIDEO output
Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
480i/576i
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
480p/576p
✓
480p/576p
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
VIDEO output
1080i
1080p
480i/576i
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
1080i
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
720p
480i/576i
720p
✓
1080p
VIDEO input
480p/576p
✓
1080i
COMPONENT
VIDEO input
480i/576i
✓
720p
480i/576i
available conversion
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
En
115
APPENDIX
Information on HDMI™
■ HDMI signal compatibility
NOTES
Audio signals
Audio signal types
Audio signal formats
Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD,
etc.
DSD
2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream
Dolby Digital, DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections.
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,
depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the
component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the
component).
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents
downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio
commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
–
–
–
–
480i/60 Hz
576i/50 Hz
480p/60 Hz
576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
About trademarks
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a
license agreement.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD
Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
iPod™, iPhone™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark
of Apple Inc.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.
En
116
APPENDIX
Specifications
■ Input jacks
■ Remote jacks
■ TUNER
• Analog audio
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Audio x 5 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8ch Input)
[Others models]
Audio x 6 (PHONO, AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8ch Input)
• Digital audio
Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3)
• Video
Composite x 5 (AV3, AV4, AV5, AV6, V-AUX)
S-Video x 1 (AV5) [U.K. and Europe models]
Component x 2 (AV1, AV2)
• HDMI input
HDMI (Front Panel) x 1 (V-AUX)
HDMI (Rear Panel) x 5 (HDMI 1-5)
• Other
DOCK x 1 (AUDIO, VIDEO [Composite])
• REMOTE IN x 1
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with RDS x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
■ Output jacks
• Analog Audio
Speaker out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R*1, EXTRA SP L/R*2)
*1 Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: assignment is possible. [ZONE2, PRESENCE]
Pre Out x 7 [FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R]
Subwoofer out x 2 (MONO, SUBWOOFER)
AV OUT x 1
AUDIO OUT x 1
ZONE2 OUT x 1
• Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
AV OUT
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 1
■ HDMI
• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync,
ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
• Analog up Conversion
- 480i/60 Hz (NTSC)
- 576i/50 Hz (PAL)
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• Up-Scaling
- 480i → 480p/720p/1080i/1080p
- 480p → 720p/1080i/1080p
- 576i → 576p/720p/1080i/1080p
- 576p → 720p/1080i/1080p
• Audio Format
- Dolby Digital
- DTS
- DSD 6ch
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby TrueHD
- DTS-HD
- PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Satellite Radio Ready [U.S.A. model]
SIRIUS Radio x 1 (SIRIUS)
■ Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
■ AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround
(20-20 kHz, 0.08% THD, 8 Ω)
FRONT L/R ................................................................... 90 W+90 W
CENTER................................................................................... 90 W
SURROUND L/R ..........................................................90 W+90 W
SURROUND BACK L/R ..............................................90 W+90 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω...................................125/160/190/230 W
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω ........................................................................................ 1.43 dB
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
En
117
APPENDIX
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5, etc. ....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH IN ...........................................................200 mV/47 kΩ
[Other models]
PHONO ......................................................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AV5, etc. ....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH IN ...........................................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5, etc. (1 kHz 0.5% THD) ..................................... 2.3 V or more
[Other models]
PHONO (1 kHz 0.1% THD) .................................... 60 mV or more
AV5, etc. (1 kHz 0.5% THD) ..................................... 2.3 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT......................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..................................100 mV/560 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 to FRONT..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5, etc. to FRONT (PURE DIRECT)
(20-20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................................ 0.06% or less
[Other models]
PHONO (20-20 kHz, 1V)............................................ 0.02% or less
AV5, etc. to FRONT (PURE DIRECT)
(20-20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................................ 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
[U.S.A. models]
AV5, etc. (PURE DIRECT). Input Shorted
(250 mV to Front Speakers)...................................100 dB or more
[Other models]
PHONO Input Shorted (5 mV to Front Speakers)......81 dB or more
AV5, etc. (PURE DIRECT). Input Shorted
(250 mV to Front Speakers)...................................100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front Speakers ............................................................150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) .............................. 60 dB/45 dB or more
[Other models]
PHONO Input shorted..................................... 60 dB/55 dB or more
AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) .............................. 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control.......................................MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB
• Tone Control (Front Speakers)
Bass Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover Frequency.......................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ......................................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover Frequency ...................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back) .............12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ............................................................24 dB/oct.
■ VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ........................ NTSC
[Other models] ........................................................................... PAL
• Video Conversion...............................................................NTSC/PAL
■ AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] .....................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................................ 531 to 1611 kHz
■ GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model] ................... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe models]........................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] .......................................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .....................................400 W/500 VA
[Other models] ........................................................................ 400 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control off / Standby Through off ....................0.2 W or less
HDMI Control on/ Standby Through on
(Input: HDMI1, when no HDMI signal is input) ... 2.7 W (typical)
• Signal Level
Composite ..................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video
[U.K. and Europe models]....... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
435 x 151 x 364 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......1.5 Vp-p or more
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
• Weight
10.5 kg (23.1 lbs)
• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion Off) ............ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
■ FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]............................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]............87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono ...................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dB)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo..................................................................74 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3%
• Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω
En
118
APPENDIX
Index
Numerics
5 channel speaker layout .............................................................. 15
5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 15
7.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 17
7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 14
A
Adaptive DRC, OPTION menu ................................................... 51
Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 99
All channel search mode .............................................................. 60
AM antenna connection ............................................................... 32
AM tuning.................................................................................... 54
Analog to Analog Conversion, Video Setup................................ 89
ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI Setup............................... 91
Aspect, Processing, Video Setup ................................................. 90
Audio In, Input menu ................................................................... 74
Audio information, Information menu......................................... 95
AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 21
Audio Output, HDMI Setup......................................................... 92
Audio Return Channel function ................................................. 104
Auto Power Down, Function Setup ............................................. 93
Auto Preset................................................................................... 57
Auto Setup, Speaker Setup .......................................................... 84
B
BD player connection .................................................................. 25
Bi-amp connection, speaker......................................................... 18
Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 70
C
Cable plug .................................................................................... 21
Category search mode.................................................................. 60
Center Image, Sound Program menu ........................................... 82
Center Level, Sound Program menu............................................ 81
Center speaker.............................................................................. 13
Center Width, Sound Program menu ........................................... 82
Changing speaker impedance ...................................................... 18
CINEMA DSP 3D mode.............................................................. 43
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, OPTION menu.................................. 51
CINEMA DSP indicator ............................................................. 10
Clear All Preset ..................................................................... 57, 64
Clear Preset ........................................................................... 57, 64
COAXIAL jack ........................................................................... 21
COMPONENT VIDEO jack....................................................... 21
Compressed Music Enhancer mode ............................................ 44
Configuration, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ............................. 85
Connect, OPTION menu............................................................. 52
Connecting speakers.................................................................... 17
Connections................................................................................. 13
Content browse view................................................................... 53
Content window .......................................................................... 53
Cursor indicators ......................................................................... 10
D
Decode Type, Sound Program menu .................................... 81, 82
Decoder Mode, Input menu......................................................... 74
Dialogue Lift, OPTION menu..................................................... 51
Dimension, Sound Program menu .............................................. 82
Direct number access mode ........................................................ 60
Direct, Sound Program menu...................................................... 81
Disconnect, OPTION menu ........................................................ 52
Display Set, Function Setup........................................................ 93
Distance, Speaker Setup.............................................................. 86
DSP Level, Sound Program menu .............................................. 79
DVD player connection............................................................... 25
Dynamic Range, Sound Setup..................................................... 88
E
Enhancer, Input menu .................................................................
Extended Surround, OPTION menu ...........................................
External component connection ..................................................
External decoder connection .......................................................
74
51
21
29
FM tuning .................................................................................... 54
Front panel..................................................................................... 8
Front panel display ...................................................................... 10
Front Presence L Level, Sound Program menu........................... 81
Front Presence R Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 82
Front speaker ............................................................................... 13
Function Setup............................................................................. 93
G
Game connection......................................................................... 29
H
HDMI Control function............................................................. 102
HDMI Control, HDMI Setup ...................................................... 91
HDMI indicator ........................................................................... 10
HDMI jack................................................................................... 21
HDMI monitor, Information menu.............................................. 95
HDMI Setup ................................................................................ 90
High-frequency sound adjustment............................................... 40
I
Information menu ........................................................................ 95
INIT, Advanced Setup menu..................................................... 101
Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ............................................ 79
Initial Volume, Sound Setup ....................................................... 89
Input menu................................................................................... 72
iPhone™ playback ...................................................................... 65
iPod Interlock, Input menu.......................................................... 75
iPod wireless system ................................................................... 68
iPod™ playback .......................................................................... 65
J
Jack.............................................................................................. 21
F
L
FM antenna connection ............................................................... 32
FM Mode..................................................................................... 56
Language ..................................................................................... 94
Level, Speaker Setup................................................................... 86
En
119
APPENDIX
Index
Lipsync, Sound Setup .................................................................. 88
Liveness, Sound Program menu .................................................. 80
Load, SCENE menu..................................................................... 77
Low-frequency sound adjustment................................................ 40
M
Manual Preset............................................................................... 54
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ...................................................... 84
Manual Tuning............................................................................. 56
Max Volume, Sound Setup .......................................................... 88
Memory Guard, Function Setup .................................................. 94
Menu browse control ................................................................... 66
MON.CHK, Advanced Setup menu........................................... 101
Multi information display ............................................................ 10
Multi-format player connection ................................................... 29
Multi-zone function ................................................................... 105
MUTE indicator ........................................................................... 10
N
Normal tuning .............................................................................. 54
Now playing view ........................................................................ 53
O
ON SCREEN menu...................................................................... 47
On-Screen display ........................................................................ 12
OPTICAL jack ............................................................................. 21
OPTION menu ............................................................................. 49
P
Pairing, OPTION menu ............................................................... 52
Panorama, Sound Program menu................................................. 82
Parametric EQ, Speaker Setup..................................................... 87
Parental Lock ............................................................................... 63
PHONES jack ................................................................................ 8
Portable audio player connection................................................. 29
Power Amp Assign, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..................... 84
PREOUT connection ................................................................... 30
Presence speaker .......................................................................... 13
Presence speaker layout ............................................................... 14
Preset Select ................................................................................ 56
Pure Direct mode......................................................................... 44
R
Radio Control .............................................................................. 63
Rear panel...................................................................................... 9
Remote control ............................................................................ 11
Remote control battery installation ............................................... 7
Remote control connection ......................................................... 30
Remote control, Controlling other components .......................... 96
REMOTE ID, Advanced Setup menu ....................................... 100
Rename/Icon Select, Input menu ................................................ 73
Rename/Icon Select, SCENE menu ............................................ 77
Repeat, OPTION menu ............................................................... 52
Reset, SCENE menu ................................................................... 77
Resolution, Processing, Video Setup .......................................... 90
Reverb Delay, Sound Program menu.......................................... 80
Reverb Level, Sound Program menu .......................................... 81
Reverb Time, Sound Program menu........................................... 80
Room Size, Sound Program menu .............................................. 79
S
Satellite Radio .............................................................................
Save, SCENE menu ....................................................................
SCENE function..........................................................................
SCENE menu ..............................................................................
Setup menu..................................................................................
Shuffle, OPTION menu ..............................................................
SILENT CINEMA mode ............................................................
Simple remote control .................................................................
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ...............................................................
SiriusConnect™ tuner .................................................................
Sound program ............................................................................
Sound Program menu..................................................................
Sound Setup ................................................................................
SP IMP., Advanced Setup menu .................................................
Speaker connection .....................................................................
Speaker indicators .......................................................................
Speaker layout.............................................................................
Speaker setting ............................................................................
58
77
41
76
83
52
43
68
58
58
41
78
88
99
13
10
14
33
Speaker Setup .............................................................................. 84
SR PIN, Advanced Setup menu ................................................ 100
Standby Charge, Input menu ....................................................... 74
Standby Through, HDMI Setup .................................................. 92
Straight Decoding Mode ............................................................. 42
Subwoofer ................................................................................... 13
Supplied accessories...................................................................... 7
Surround Back Initial Delay, Sound Program menu................... 79
Surround Back L Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 81
Surround Back Liveness, Sound Program menu......................... 80
Surround Back R Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 81
Surround Back Room Size, Sound Program menu ..................... 79
Surround back speaker ................................................................ 13
Surround Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ............................ 79
Surround L Level, Sound Program menu.................................... 81
Surround Liveness, Sound Program menu ............................ 79, 80
Surround R Level, Sound Program menu ................................... 81
Surround speaker......................................................................... 13
T
Test Tone, Speaker Setup............................................................ 87
Tone control ................................................................................ 40
Tone Control, OPTION menu ..................................................... 50
Trigger connection ...................................................................... 31
Trigger Output, Function Setup................................................... 94
Tuner indicator ............................................................................ 10
TV Audio Input, HDMI Setup .................................................... 91
TV FORMAT, Advanced Setup menu...................................... 101
TV monitor connection ............................................................... 22
V
VIDEO AUX input cover.............................................................. 7
Video information, Information menu ........................................ 95
VIDEO jack................................................................................. 21
Video Out, Input menu................................................................ 75
Video Setup ................................................................................. 89
Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D mode................................................. 43
Virtual CINEMA DSP mode....................................................... 43
VOLUME...................................................................................... 8
VOLUME indicator..................................................................... 10
En
120
APPENDIX
Index
Volume Trim, OPTION menu ..................................................... 52
Y
YPAO........................................................................................... 33
Z
Zone2 Set, Multi Zone ................................................................. 92
En
121
© 2010 Yamaha Corporation
YC513D0/OMEN1
English
for U.S.A.
Quick Reference Guide
■
Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with this product.
PUSH
Remote control
Batteries (2)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
VIDEO AUX input cover
YPAO microphone
Preparing the remote control
1
3
1
Take off the battery compartment cover.
2
Insert the two supplied AAA batteries
into the battery case, following the
polarity markings.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
within 20 feet (6 m)
2
■
3
Snap the battery compartment cover
back into place.
Items necessary for connection
Speakers
Ex.
Ex.
Front speaker
Ex.
Center speaker
Surround speaker, surround back
speaker, and presence speaker
Ex.
Active subwoofer
• Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6Ω. 4Ω speakers can also be used as the front speakers. For more information on speaker
impedance, refer to page 3.
• If you are using a CRT monitor, we recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers.
• Prepare at least two front speakers. The priority of the other speakers is as follows:
1 Two surround speakers
2 One center speaker
3 One (or two) surround back speaker (s)/presence speakers
External components
Cable
• Cables for connecting external components
(may differ depending on the components you are connecting)
• Speaker cables
(a quantity to match the number of speakers you are connecting)
• Audio pin cable
(for subwoofer)
TV
Playback device such as
BD (Blu-ray Disc)/DVD players
-1-
Connect and install as follows the first time you use this unit.
See the following explanations for the connections for each number.
TV
3
2
BD/DVD player
(recorder)
4
This unit
Front
speaker R
Front
speaker L
Subwoofer
Surround
speaker R
1
Center speaker
6.1
Surround back
speaker
1
Surround
speaker L
7.1
7.1
Surround back
speaker L
Surround back
speaker R
7.1 Connect when using with 7.1-channel speaker
layout. Place the surround back speakers
(L/R) 12 in (30 cm) or more away from each
other.
6.1 Connect when using with 6.1-channel speaker
layout. Place the surround back speaker
behind the listening position.
1 Connect the speakers
2 Connect a TV
3 Connect playback device such as BD/DVD players and recorders
4 Connect the AC power cable
5 Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
-2-
1
Connect the speakers
Front speaker
R
L
Surround
speaker
R
L
7.1 Connect when using with 7.1-channel speaker layout.
6.1 Connect when using with 6.1-channel speaker layout.
Surround back
speaker
R
L
7.1
7.1
6.1
Caution:
• Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet
before connecting the speakers.
• Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated
cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line
running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different
colored (or lined) cable into the “+” (positive, red) terminal
on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “-”
(minus, black) terminal.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch
anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit.
This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables
short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front panel
display when this unit is switched on.
• This unit is configured for 8Ω speakers at the factory setting.
When connecting 6Ω speakers, configure the speaker impedance
setting of this unit to 6Ω. When this unit is configured for 6Ω
speakers, 4Ω speakers can also be used as the front speakers.
For more information on setting the speaker impedance, refer to
“Changing speaker impedance” in the Owner’s Manual.
SPEAKERS
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
FRONT
HDMI 5
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
MOTE
SINGLE
+12V
0.1A MAX.
GER OUT
CENTER
ND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
TI CH INPUT
SINGLE
AUDIO
OUT
FRONT
ZONE2
OUT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
1 SUBWOOFER
OOFER 2
Center speaker
• When connecting the presence speakers, refer to “Presence speaker
connection” in the Owner’s Manual.
• This unit can connect speakers that support Bi-amp connection for front
speakers. Refer to “Bi-amp connection” in the Owner’s Manual for the
details.
Subwoofer
Connecting speakers
2
FR
ON
T
3
Connecting the banana plug
Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug
into the end of the terminal.
1
4
FR
ON
T
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the ends of the speaker cables,
and twist the bare wires of the cables together
firmly so that they will not cause short circuits.
2
Loosen the speaker terminals.
3
Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the
gap on the side of the terminal.
4
Tighten the terminal.
Banana plug
Connecting the subwoofer
1
2
Connect the subwoofer input jack to the SUBWOOFER
1 or 2 jack on this unit with an audio pin cable.
Set the subwoofer volume as follows.
Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than half).
Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer examples
-3-
2
Connect a TV
If your TV has multiple inputs, connect with the following priority (A to C).
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
A When using an HDMI
compatible TV.
H
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
SIRIUS
HDMI
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
PR
PB
PB
Y
Y
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OUT
75
PB
PR
B When using a component
VIDEO
VIDEO
PB
Y
V +12V
0.1A MA
MONITOR OUT
Y
video input-compatible TV.
TRIGGER OUT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
A 1
AV
A 2
AV
A 3
AV
AV 4
A
OPTICAL
AV 5
A
AV 6
A
A
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
SURROUND
SU
MULT
MULTI
L I CH IN
AUDIO 2
VIDEO
C When using a TV compatible
V
Video input to this unit is output to a TV using output jacks of the
same kind.
When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV
Connect to the TV using the same type of connection that you used to
connect to the playback device, and change the inputs on your TV to
match that of the playback device you are using for playback.
If the playback device and TV are equipped with different types
of analog video jacks, this unit will convert the video signal to
component video signal, or vice-versa, according to the type of video
input jacks used by the TV. For more information on video signal
conversion, refer to “Connecting a TV monitor” in the Owner’s Manual.
When connecting to an HDMI compatible TV
Video signal such as component video and video received by this unit
is converted to HDMI and output to the TV. Just select HDMI input on
the TV to view video from any external source connected to this unit.
You can change the resolution and aspect ratio used when converting
to HDMI to suit your requirements.
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
with video input only.
Input
Output
HDMI input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Component
video input
VIDEO
VIDEO
TV
Component
video input
Video input
VIDEO
Video input
Through
Converted
Through
Converted
Listening to TV audio
To playback TV audio on this unit, connect the TV audio output to this unit.
When using an HDMI compatible TV that supports
Audio Return Channel functions and / or HDMI Control functions
(e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), you can enjoy the TV sound on this
unit as follows:
Connect the following input jacks, matching the audio output jacks on your TV.
When viewing your TV, select the appropriate input source on this unit.
ARC
OPTICAL
When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel
function and HDMI Control function
The audio / video output from the unit to the TV and audio output
from the TV to the unit are possible using a single HDMI cable.
The input source is switched automatically to match operations
carried out on the TV, and that makes TV sound control easier to
use.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Using the HDMI Control
function” in the Owner’s Manual.
HDMI OUT
DOCK
O
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SIRIUS
Audio
output
PR
PB
VIDEO
Y
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
A
A 2
AV
A 3
AV
AV 4
Audio output from TV
Input jack on this unit
Optical digital output
AV1 or AV4
OPTICAL
AV 5
A
Coaxial digital output
AV2 or AV3
Analog output
One of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2,
and VIDEO-AUX
HDMI Audio Return Channel
(Described in the right column)
HDMI OUT
When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions
When HDMI Control functions are enabled on the unit, input source
can be switched automatically to match operations carried out on
the TV.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Using the HDMI Control
function” in the Owner’s Manual.
✽ Connecting to AV4 allows you to playback TV audio just by pressing the
TV under SCENE key.
-4-
3
Connect playback device such as BD/DVD players and recorders
If your playback device has multiple audio/video outputs, connect with the following priority
(A to D) to enjoy a higher quality sounds and images.
A When playback device is capable
HDMI
HDMI
of HDMI output
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
B When playback device is capable
of component video output (with
optical digital audio output)
PR
ARC
PB
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
OPTICAL
PR
PR
PR
PB
PB
PB
Y
Y
SIRIUS
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
Y
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
O
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
V
Y
C When playback device is capable
of component video output (with
coaxial digital audio output)
MONITOR OUT
PR
of video output (with analog audio
output) only
TRIGGER OUT
L
PB
R
O
Y
COAXIAL
C
D When playback device is capable
+12V
0.1A MAX.
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
( TV )
AV 1
AV 2
A 3
AV
A 4
AV
OPTICAL
AV 5
A 6
AV
A
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SU
MULT
MULTI
L I CH INPUT
C
VIDEO
V
AUDIO
L
R
• When playback, select the corresponding input source to which the jack is connected.
• At the default settings, input sources and sound programs are preset on the SCENE keys. When a playback device is connected to HDMI 1
pressing BD/DVD under SCENE key selects the HDMI 1 input. When a playback device is connected to AV3, pressing CD under SCENE selects
the AV3 input. The input source and sound program preset on the SCENE key can be changed. For more information on the SCENE function,
refer to “Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)” in the Owner’s Manual.
• If necessary, you can connect components that cannot be connected using the above methods, such as devices that output video from
component video output jacks and audio from analog output jacks. Refer to “Connecting external components” in the Owner’s Manual for
details.
4
Connect the AC power cable
SPEAKERS
To the power outlet
SURROUND BACK/
BACK/BI-AMP
K BI-AMP
AC power cable
SINGLE
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/
PRESENCE
SINGLE
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
CENTER
1 SUBWOOFER 2
-5-
5
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
When all connections are complete, adjust the configuration, sizes, and volume
balance of the speakers to provide an optimal sound field. This unit is equipped with a
Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function that adjusts the speaker
balance automatically with a simple procedure.
When using YPAO, a test tone will be output from the speakers for approximately 3 minutes to measure acoustics. Be aware of the following when
using YPAO.
• The test tone is output at high volume. Refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
• Take care that the test tone does not frighten small children.
YPAO operations can be viewed on the front panel display or TV screen. TV display is used here to explain operation.
1
Check the following before using YPAO.
This unit
Subwoofer
• The headphones are removed.
• The power is turned on.
• Volume is set to approximately half, and the
cross-over frequency (if present) is set to
maximum.
TV
• This unit is connected to the TV correctly.
• The power is turned on.
• The video input to which the video output
from this unit has been selected.
2
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer examples
Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in your listening
position.
YPAO microphone
When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use equipment that allows you to
adjust the height (such as a tripod) as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod
screws to fix the microphone in place.
3
Press RECEIVER A on the remote control to switch this unit on.
4
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
“Mic On. View ON SCREEN” appears on
the front panel display, and then the display
at right appears on the TV screen.
MAIN ZONE
YPAO MIC
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO microphone
This completes preparation. To achieve more accurate results, take note of the following when measuring acoustics.
• It takes approximately 3 minutes to accurately measure acoustics. Keep the room as quiet as possible while acoustics are measured.
• Wait in a corner of the room, or leave it entirely, while acoustics are measured to avoid creating an obstruction between the speakers and
the YPAO microphone.
Continues to
the next page
-6-
5
Use the cursor B/C to select the “Measure” and
press ENTER to start measurement.
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
RECEIVER A
HDMI
1
2
5
V-AUX
V
VAUX
3
4
AUDIO
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
MULT
L I
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
A
AV
The following display appears if measurement finishes without any problems.
1
Result
Displays the results of automatic acoustics measurement and sets
the equalizer (parametric equalizer) to provide a unified sound
field. For details, refer to “Reviewing and reloading the automatic
setup parameters” in the Owner’s Manual.
Save/Exit
CATEGORY
CAT
A EGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
Applies the result to the speaker setup and finishes the automatic
measurement.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
HOLD
Use the cursor B/C to select “Save/Exit” and press ENTER.
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
TV
INPUT
MUTE
Use the cursor D/E to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
When the display at left appears, the YPAO setup is complete.
8
Press ENTER.
YPAO is automatically terminated. Disconnect the YPAO
microphone.
MAIN ZONE
YPAO MIC
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
You can use the following functions with this unit. For details on the
operations, refer to the Owner’s Manual on the supplied CD-ROM.
Adjustment for various parameters to match your listening environment
- Sound quality control with a prametric equalizer
- Easy listening at low volumes
- Adjusting volume between input sources
External device connection and playback
- Connections and playback from BD/DVD players (recorders), TV audio, and other devices
- Playback from an iPod/iPhone
- Playback from a Bluetooth device
FM/AM tuner
- Manual preset tuning
etc.
-7-
MUTE
REC
TV VOL
7
RADIO
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
6
CD
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Note
If a problem occurs, an error message or report is displayed either during or after acoustic
measurement. Refer to “When an error message is displayed during measurement,” or “When a
warning message is displayed after measurement” in the Owner’s Manual to resolve the problem
and measure acoustics with YPAO again.
TUN./CH
TV CH
4
8
ENT
ENTER, Cursor
Operation guide
A
B
C
D
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
YPAO MIC
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNING/CH
CATEGORY
FM
AM
VOLUME
SCENE
BD
DVD
PHONES
INPUT
TONE CONTROL
TV
CD
PROGRAM
RADIO
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
SILENT CINEMA
HDMI IN
G
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
F
A Switches this unit between on and standby mode
This unit switches between on and standby mode every time you press this key.
A
B Choose an input source to listen to
The name of the selected input source appears on the front panel display.
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
VOL.
HDMI1
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
SOURCE RECEIVER
R
SR
SBR
HDMI
C Switches between input settings
BD/DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Input
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
[ A ]
AV
Sound field program
HDMI1
AV4
AV3
TUNER
2
AUDIO
You can switch input sources and sound field programs with a single key.
SCENE
1
1
Drama
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
- Pressing and holding this key allows you to store input sources/sound field programs.
- Press this key when this unit is in standby mode to switch on the unit.
F
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SLEEP
D Adjusts the volume level
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
The current volume level is displayed on the front panel display.
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
C
VOLUME
D
MUTE
E
VOL.
Volume -18.5dB
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
OPTION
ON SCREEN
R
SR
SBR
ENTER
E Mutes the sound
RETURN
DISPLAY
The indicator blinks while the sound is muted.
F Select sound field programs and sound decoders
Front
panel
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
REC
HOLD
Remote
control
MOVIE
B
Description
Selects sound field programs optimized for viewing movies, dramas,
and sports.
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
4
8
PROGRAM
MUSIC
Selects sound field programs optimized for appreciating music.
ENT
TV
SUR. DECODE
Selects surround decoders such as Dolby Pro Logic II.
INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
MUTE
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Switches to Straight decoding mode for stereo/multi-channel
playback without using a sound field program.
Switches to Pure Direct mode for faithful reproduction of audio.
- When playing back compression artifacts, press ENHANCER to turn on the Compressed
Music Enhancer mode.
G Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control)
1
Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
TONE
Treble
2
VOL.
+0.5dB
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output level in those frequency
ranges.
- You can set the tone control for speakers and headphones separately. Connect the
headphones when adjusting the headphone tone control.
- If you set an extreme tone balance, sounds may not match those from other channels.
©2010 Yamaha Corporation
-8-
YC513B0/QREN1
List of remote control codes
Lista de códigos de mando a distancia
Liste des codes de commande
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Elenco dei codici di telecomando
TV
A.R. Systems
Acme
Acura
ADC
Admiral
0320
0342
0323, 0343
0337
0054, 0178, 0336,
0337, 0339, 0346,
0347
Advent
0158
Adventura
0057
Adyson
0277, 0282, 0342
Agashi
0277, 0282
Agazi
0337
Aiko
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0342, 0343
Aim
0320
Aiwa
0078, 0379
Akai
0050, 0055, 0109,
0159, 0181, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0343, 0349,
0350
Akiba
0320, 0340
Akura
0320, 0323, 0337,
0340
Alaron
0277
Alba
0161, 0277, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0349,
0351, 0372, 0382
Albatron
0140
Alcyon
0171
Alleron
0059
Allorgan
0282
Allstar
0320, 0350
America Action 0179
AMOi
0276
Amplivision
0161, 0282, 0321,
0342
Amstrad
0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0343
Amtron
0058
Anam
0179, 0343
Anam National 0052, 0058
Anglo
0323, 0343
Anitech
0171, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0343
Ansonic
0161, 0168, 0320,
0323, 0341, 0343
AOC
0008, 0026, 0050,
0053
Apex
0039, 0111, 0217
Arcam
0277, 0282
Arcam Delta
0342
Aristona
0320, 0349, 0350
Arthur Martin 0321
ASA
0339, 0347
Asberg
0171, 0320, 0350
Astra
0343
Asuka
0277, 0282, 0337,
0340, 0342
Atlantic
0277, 0320, 0342,
0349, 0350
Atori
0323, 0343
Auchan
0321
Audiosonic
0161, 0282, 0320,
0340, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350
AudioTon
0161, 0282, 0342
Audiovox
0058, 0179, 0194
Ausind
0171
Autovox
0171, 0282, 0337,
0339, 0342
Aventura
0051
Awa
0277, 0282
Axion
Baird
Bang & Olufsen
Basic Line
0156
0282
0180, 0339
0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0343, 0350
Bastide
0282, 0342
Baur
0320, 0349
Bazin
0282
Beko
0161, 0269, 0294,
0302, 0311, 0320,
0328, 0351
Belcor
0008
Bell & Howell 0019, 0054
Benq
0097, 0242, 0361
Beon
0320, 0349, 0350
Best
0161
Bestar
0161, 0320, 0350
Binatone
0282, 0342
Blue Sky
0320, 0340
Blue Star
0348
Boots
0282, 0342
BPL
0320, 0348
Bradford
0058, 0179
Brandt
0322, 0345
Brillian
0182
Brinkmann
0320
Brionvega
0320, 0339, 0349,
0350
Britannia
0277, 0282, 0342
Brockwood
0008
Broksonic
0109, 0179
Bruns
0339
BTC
0340
Bush
0269, 0282, 0283,
0304, 0320, 0323,
0328, 0332, 0340,
0343, 0344, 0346,
0348, 0349, 0350,
0372, 0382, 0463,
0470, 0472
Candle
0008, 0026, 0050,
0057
Capsonic
0337
Carena
0320
Carnivale
0050
Carrefour
0344
Carver
0010
Cascade
0320, 0323, 0343
Casio
0367
Cathay
0320, 0349, 0350
CCE
0183, 0282
Celebrity
0055, 0107
Celera
0039
Centurion
0320, 0349, 0350
Century
0339
CGE
0161, 0171
Changhong
0039
Chimei
0273
Cimline
0323, 0343
Citizen
0007, 0008, 0026,
0050, 0058
City
0323, 0343
Clarion
0179
Clarivox
0349
Clatronic
0161, 0171, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0342, 0343,
0350, 0351
CMS
0277
CMS Hightec 0282
Coby
0197
Colortyme
0008, 0026
Commercial Solutions
0021
Concerto
0008, 0026
Concorde
0323, 0343
Condor
0161, 0277, 0320,
0323, 0342, 0350,
0351
Contec
0179, 0277, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0344
Contec/Cony
0012, 0058
Continental Edison
0345
Cosmel
0323, 0343
Craig
0058, 0179
Crosley
0010, 0037, 0171,
0339
Crown
0058, 0161, 0171,
0179, 0320, 0323,
0343, 0349, 0350,
0351
CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342
CTC Clatronic 0341
CTX
0205
Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010,
0019, 0021, 0026,
0049, 0050, 0178
CXC
0058, 0179
Cybertron
0340
Cytron
0152
Daewoo
0007, 0008, 0026,
0037, 0053, 0167,
0266, 0275, 0277,
0282, 0315, 0320,
0323, 0331, 0335,
0342, 0343, 0350,
0381, 0465
Dainichi
0277, 0340
Dansai
0277, 0282, 0320,
0337, 0349, 0350
Dantax
0161, 0349
Dawa
0320
Daytron
0007, 0008, 0026,
0323, 0343
De Graaf
0346
Decca
0282, 0320, 0342,
0349, 0350
Dell
0145, 0245
Denver
0358, 0362
Desmet
0320, 0349, 0350
Diamant
0320
Diamond
0277
DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Dimensia
0049
Disney
0219
Dixi
0282, 0320, 0323,
0343, 0349, 0350
Dream Vision 0461, 0498
DTS
0323, 0343
Dual
0282, 0320, 0342
Dual-Tec
0342, 0343
Dumont
0008, 0030, 0062,
0282, 0339, 0341,
0342
Durabrand
0031, 0051, 0179,
0215
Dux
0349
Dwin
0178
Dynatron
0320, 0349, 0350
Dynex
0228, 0231
Elbe
0161, 0168, 0282,
0320
Elcit
0339
Electa
0348
ELECTRO TECH 0343
Electroband
0055, 0107
Electrograph
0176
Electrohome
0008, 0026, 0052,
0055
Element
0230
-1-
Elin
Elite
Elman
Elta
Emerson
Emprex
Envision
Epson
Erres
ESA
ESC
Etron
Eurofeel
Euro-Feel
Euroline
Euroman
Euromann
Europhon
Expert
Exquisit
Fenner
Ferguson
Fidelity
Filsai
Finlandia
Finlux
FIRST LINE
Firstline
Fisher
Flint
Formenti
Formenti/Phoenix
Fortress
Fraba
Friac
Frontech
Fujitsu
Fujitsu General
Fujitsu Siemens
Funai
Futuretech
Galaxi
Galaxis
Gateway
GBC
GE
Geant Casino
GEC
Geloso
General Technic
0277, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0349, 0350
0320, 0340, 0350
0341
0277, 0323, 0343
0000, 0007, 0008,
0012, 0013, 0019,
0026, 0031, 0037,
0051, 0058, 0059,
0161, 0179, 0320,
0339
0154
0008, 0026, 0050
0155, 0206, 0359
0320, 0349, 0350
0051
0282
0343
0282
0337
0349
0161, 0277, 0282
0320, 0337, 0342,
0350
0277, 0282, 0320,
0341, 0342, 0350
0321
0320
0323, 0343
0322, 0345, 0349
0277, 0320, 0342,
0346
0282
0346
0171, 0282, 0320,
0339, 0341, 0342,
0349, 0350
0342, 0343, 0350
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323
0019, 0161, 0282,
0339, 0342, 0344,
0351
0320, 0350
0171, 0277, 0336,
0339, 0342, 0349
0277
0336, 0339
0161, 0320
0161
0282, 0323, 0337,
0343, 0346, 0347
0059, 0069, 0074,
0075, 0282
0282
0504, 0505, 0507,
0510, 0511
0051, 0058, 0059,
0112, 0113, 0115,
0118, 0119, 0179,
0337
0058, 0179
0320, 0351
0161, 0320
0176, 0177, 0241
0323, 0343, 0344
0008, 0021, 0023,
0026, 0027, 0031,
0034, 0049, 0052,
0056, 0209
0321
0282, 0320, 0342,
0347, 0349, 0350
0323, 0343, 0346
0323, 0343
Genexxa
0320, 0340, 0347,
0350
GFM
0128, 0227
Giant
0282
Gibralter
0008, 0030, 0050,
0062
GoldHand
0277
Goldline
0320
GoldStar
0007, 0008, 0012,
0026, 0031, 0050,
0053, 0161, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0346,
0349, 0350
Goodmans
0246, 0272, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0337,
0343, 0344, 0349,
0350, 0462, 0473,
0477
Gorenje
0161, 0351
GPM
0340
GPX
0129
Gradiente
0240
Graetz
0347
Granada
0171, 0282, 0320,
0321, 0342, 0344,
0346, 0349, 0350
Grandin
0340, 0343, 0348,
0349
Gronic
0282
Grundig
0160, 0161, 0171,
0310, 0320
Grunpy
0058, 0059, 0179
Haier
0157, 0233
Halifax
0277, 0282, 0337,
0342
Hallmark
0008, 0026, 0031
Hampton
0277, 0282, 0342
Hanseatic
0161, 0168, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0349,
0350
Hantarex
0320, 0323, 0343
Hantor
0320
Harman/Kardon 0010
Harvard
0058, 0179
Harwood
0320, 0323
Havermy
0178
HCM
0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0342, 0343,
0348
Hema
0282, 0323
Hewlett Packard 0192
Higashi
0277
HiLine
0320
Hinari
0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0344, 0349,
0350
Hisawa
0321, 0340, 0348
Hisense
0247
Hitachi
0008, 0012, 0026,
0066, 0084, 0092,
0093, 0120, 0172,
0173, 0255, 0270,
0271, 0282, 0320,
0335, 0338, 0342,
0344, 0346, 0347,
0365, 0382, 0448,
0456, 0467
Hornyphon
0320, 0350
Hoshai
0340
Huanyu
0277, 0342
Hygashi
0277, 0282, 0342
Hyper
0277, 0282, 0323,
0342, 0343
Hypson
0282, 0320, 0321,
0337, 0342, 0348,
0349, 0350
Hyundai
0141
Iberia
0320
ICE
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0350
ICeS
0277
Ilo
0148, 0153
IMA
0058
Imperial
0161, 0171, 0320,
0347, 0350, 0351
Indiana
0320, 0349, 0350
Infinity
InFocus
0010
0250, 0327, 0363,
0479, 0508
Ingelen
0347
Ingersol
0323, 0343
Initial
0153
Inno Hit
0171, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Innovation
0337, 0343
Insignia
0131, 0228, 0236,
0238
Inteq
0030
Interactive
0161
Interbuy
0323, 0343
Interfunk
0161, 0320, 0339,
0347, 0349, 0350
International
0277
Intervision
0161, 0282, 0320,
0337, 0341, 0342
Irradio
0171, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0343, 0349,
0350
Isukai
0320, 0340
ITC
0282, 0342
ITS
0277, 0320, 0340,
0348, 0350
ITT
0343, 0347
ITV
0320, 0343, 0349
Janeil
0057
JBL
0010
JC Penney
0007, 0008, 0026,
0027, 0049, 0053,
0056
JCB
0055, 0107
Jensen
0008, 0026
JVC
0012, 0014, 0015,
0056, 0064, 0065,
0067, 0169, 0174,
0297, 0314, 0344,
0350, 0375
Kaisui
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0348
Kamosonic
0342
Kamp
0277, 0342
Kapsch
0347
Karcher
0161, 0320, 0342,
0343, 0349
Kawasho
0008, 0026, 0055,
0277
KEC
0179
Kendo
0161, 0320, 0341,
0346
Kenwood
0008, 0026, 0050
KIC
0282
Kingsley
0277, 0342
KLH
0039
Kloss Novabeam 0057, 0058
Kneissel
0161, 0168, 0320
Kolster
0320, 0350
Konka
0340
Korpel
0320, 0349, 0350
Korting
0161, 0339
Kosmos
0320
Koyoda
0343
KTV
0007, 0050, 0058,
0179, 0183, 0282,
0342
Kyoto
0277, 0282
Lasat
0161
Lenco
0323, 0343
Lenoir
0323, 0342, 0343
Leyco
0320, 0337, 0349,
0350
LG
0031, 0053, 0066,
0116, 0117, 0140,
0161, 0164, 0175,
0195, 0269, 0277,
0282, 0300, 0309,
0317, 0320, 0323,
0328, 0342, 0343,
0346, 0349, 0350,
0366, 0368, 0377,
0466, 0471, 0478
LG/GoldStar
0164
Liesenk
0349
Liesenkotter
0320
Life
0337, 0343
Lifetec
0320, 0323, 0337,
0343
Lloyds
0323
Loewe
0161, 0168, 0265,
0320, 0330, 0352
Loewe Opta
0339, 0349, 0350
Logik
0054
Luma
0320, 0323, 0346,
0349
Lumatron
0282, 0320, 0346,
0349, 0350
Lux May
0350
Luxman
0008, 0026
Luxor
0282, 0342, 0346
LXI
0010, 0019, 0021,
0026, 0027, 0031,
0049, 0111
M Electronic
0342, 0343, 0345,
0347, 0349, 0350
MAG
0096
Magnadyne
0339, 0341, 0349
Magnafon
0171, 0277, 0341,
0342
Magnavox
0008, 0009, 0010,
0013, 0026, 0032,
0033, 0048, 0050,
0128, 0211, 0212,
0224, 0226, 0239
Magnum
0337, 0343
Majestic
0054
Mandor
0337
Manesth
0282, 0320, 0337,
0342, 0349, 0350
Marantz
0008, 0010, 0026,
0050, 0204, 0320,
0349, 0350
Marelli
0339
Mark
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0349, 0350
Masuda
0282
Matsui
0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0344,
0346, 0349, 0350,
0455
Matsushita
0017
Maxent
0147, 0176
Mediator
0320, 0349, 0350
Medion
0320, 0337, 0343
Megapower
0140
Megatron
0026, 0031
MElectronic
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323
Melvox
0321
Memorex
0019, 0026, 0031,
0053, 0054, 0137,
0215, 0323, 0343
Memphis
0323, 0343
Mercury
0320, 0323
Metz
0339
MGA
0008, 0026, 0031,
0050, 0053
Micromaxx
0337, 0343
Microstar
0337, 0343
Midland
0007, 0021, 0023,
0027, 0030, 0056,
0062
Minerva
0171
Minoka
0320, 0350
Mintek
0153
Mitsubishi
0008, 0026, 0031,
0053, 0066, 0084,
0093, 0098, 0150,
0178, 0289, 0320,
0339, 0344, 0350,
0376
Mivar
0161, 0168, 0171,
0277, 0282, 0342
Monivision
0140
Montgomery Ward
0054
Motion
0171
Motorola
0052, 0178
MTC
0008, 0026, 0050,
0053, 0161, 0277
Multi System
0349
-2-
Multitech
Murphy
NAD
Naonis
NEC
Neckermann
NEI
Net-TV
Neufunk
New Tech
New World
NewTech
Nicamagic
Nikkai
Nikko
Nobliko
Nokia
Norcent
Nordic
Nordmende
Nordvision
Novatronic
Oceanic
Okano
Olevia
ONCEAS
Onwa
Opera
Oppo
Optimus
Optoma
Optonica
Orbit
Orion
Orline
Osaki
Oso
Otto Versand
Pael
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
Panasonic
Panavision
Pathe Cinema
Pausa
Penney
Perdio
Perfekt
Philco
Philharmonic
Philips
0058, 0161, 0179,
0183, 0277, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0341,
0342, 0343, 0344,
0346, 0349
0277, 0342
0026, 0031, 0111
0346
0008, 0026, 0050,
0052, 0053, 0072,
0103, 0282, 0344
0161, 0282, 0320,
0339, 0342, 0346,
0349, 0350, 0351
0320, 0349, 0350
0176
0320, 0323
0343, 0350
0340
0282, 0320, 0323
0277, 0342
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340,
0342, 0349, 0350
0026, 0031, 0050
0171, 0277, 0341,
0342
0347
0201
0282
0339, 0345, 0347,
0350
0349
0320
0321, 0347
0161, 0320, 0351
0102, 0199, 0200,
0207, 0222
0342
0058, 0179
0320
0130
0017, 0019
0144
0178
0320, 0350
0043, 0146, 0283,
0320, 0323, 0328,
0343, 0349, 0350
0320
0282, 0320, 0337,
0340, 0342
0340
0282, 0320, 0336,
0342, 0344, 0348,
0349, 0350
0277, 0342
0161, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0351
0282
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0342,
0343
0016, 0017, 0020,
0022, 0023, 0035,
0052, 0056, 0084,
0085, 0133, 0163,
0193, 0284, 0286,
0290, 0292, 0320,
0325, 0347, 0356
0320
0161, 0168, 0277,
0321, 0342
0323, 0343
0021, 0023, 0031,
0050, 0111
0277, 0320
0320
0008, 0009, 0010,
0012, 0026, 0050,
0052, 0053, 0161,
0171, 0320, 0339
0282, 0342
0008, 0009, 0010,
0011, 0012, 0032,
0048, 0049, 0052,
0122, 0128, 0134,
0186, 0187, 0213,
0221, 0224, 0226,
0239, 0256, 0257,
0259, 0261, 0263,
0267, 0280, 0281,
0287, 0296, 0299,
0301, 0303, 0305,
0313, 0319, 0320,
0324, 0333, 0339,
0342, 0349, 0350,
0353, 0357, 0360,
0380, 0383, 0452,
0459, 0460
Philips Magnavox 0011, 0032, 0033
Phoenix
0161, 0277, 0320,
0339, 0349, 0350
Phonola
0277, 0320, 0339,
0349, 0350
Pilot
0007, 0008, 0050
Pioneer
0008, 0026, 0094,
0095, 0161, 0320,
0345, 0347, 0349,
0350, 0458
Plantron
0320, 0323, 0337,
0350
Playsonic
0282
Polaroid
0039, 0142, 0202,
0234
Poppy
0323, 0343
Portland
0007, 0008, 0026,
0053
Prandoni-Prince 0171, 0346
Precision
0282, 0342
Prima
0157, 0243, 0323,
0343, 0347
Princeton
0140
Prism
0023, 0056
Profex
0323, 0343
Profi-Tronic
0320, 0350
Proline
0320, 0350
Proscan
0021, 0027, 0049
Prosonic
0161, 0277, 0282,
0320, 0342, 0349
Protech
0282, 0337, 0341,
0342, 0343, 0349,
0350
Proton
0008, 0012, 0026,
0031
Protron
0196
PROVIEW
0096, 0246
Provision
0320, 0349
Pulsar
0008, 0030, 0062
Pye
0256, 0320, 0349,
0350, 0378
Pymi
0323, 0343
Quandra Vision 0321
Quasar
0017, 0023, 0052,
0056
Quelle
0282, 0320, 0337,
0342, 0349, 0350
Questa
0344
Radialva
0320
RadioShack
0019, 0021, 0031,
0050, 0179, 0320
RadioShack/Realistic
0007, 0008, 0012,
0026, 0049, 0058
Radiola
0282, 0320, 0349,
0350
Radiomarelli
0320, 0339
Radiotone
0161, 0320, 0323,
0350
Rank
0344
RCA
0008, 0021, 0024,
0025, 0026, 0027,
0042, 0049, 0052,
0053, 0063, 0136,
0225
Realistic
0019, 0031, 0050,
0179
Recor
0320
Redstar
0320
Reflex
0320
Revox
0161, 0320, 0349,
0350
Rex
0337, 0346, 0347
RFT
0161, 0168, 0339
Rhapsody
0277
R-Line
0320, 0349, 0350
Roadstar
0323, 0337, 0340,
0343
Robotron
Rowa
Royal Lux
RTF
Runco
Saba
0339
0277, 0282
0161
0339
0030, 0050, 0062
0298, 0322, 0339,
0345, 0347
Saisho
0282, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343
Salora
0346, 0347
Sambers
0171, 0341
Sampo
0007, 0008, 0026,
0050, 0176
Samsung
0004, 0005, 0006,
0007, 0008, 0012,
0026, 0031, 0036,
0050, 0053, 0076,
0077, 0079, 0114,
0124, 0125, 0126,
0127, 0139, 0161,
0183, 0185, 0190,
0191, 0258, 0264,
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0334, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351, 0373,
0453, 0468
Sandra
0277, 0282, 0342
Sansui
0043, 0109, 0320,
0350
Sanyo
0008, 0019, 0068,
0070, 0071, 0099,
0161, 0168, 0223,
0237, 0277, 0282,
0288, 0295, 0323,
0342, 0344, 0369,
0469
SBR
0320, 0349
Sceptre
0235, 0244
Schaub Lorenz 0347
Schneider
0282, 0316, 0318,
0320, 0333, 0340,
0342, 0349, 0350,
0382
Scotch
0026, 0031
Scott
0008, 0012, 0026,
0031, 0058, 0059,
0149, 0179
Sears
0008, 0010, 0019,
0021, 0026, 0027,
0031, 0049, 0051,
0059, 0111
SEG
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0341,
0342, 0344, 0349,
0382
SEI
0320
SEI-Sinudyne 0339, 0341, 0347
Seleco
0344, 0346, 0347
Sencora
0323, 0343
Sentra
0323
Serino
0277
Sharp
0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0007, 0008,
0012, 0026, 0060,
0088, 0089, 0091,
0138, 0165, 0170,
0178, 0198, 0229,
0262, 0278, 0279,
0291, 0308, 0312,
0336, 0344, 0354,
0370, 0449, 0450,
0451, 0464, 0474,
0476
Sheng Chia
0178
Shogun
0008
Siarem
0320, 0339, 0341
Sierra
0320, 0350
Siesta
0161
Signature
0054
Silva
0277
Silver
0344
Singer
0321, 0339, 0341
Sinudyne
0320, 0339, 0341,
0349
Skantic
0347
Solavox
0347
Sonitron
0161, 0282
Sonoko
0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350
Sonolor
0321, 0347
Sontec
0161, 0320, 0349,
0350
Sony
0038, 0044, 0045,
0047, 0055, 0104,
0105, 0107, 0110,
0123, 0184, 0220,
0248, 0249, 0251,
0252, 0254, 0326,
0343, 0344, 0371,
0374, 0457, 0475
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341
Soundesign
0008, 0026, 0031,
0058, 0059, 0179
Soundwave
0320, 0349, 0350
Squareview
0051
SSS
0008, 0058, 0179
Standard
0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343,
0350
Starlite
0058, 0179, 0320,
0323, 0349
Stenway
0348
Stern
0346, 0347
Strato
0320, 0323
Stylandia
0282
Sunkai
0343
Sunstar
0320, 0323
Sunwood
0320, 0323, 0343,
0350
Superla
0277, 0282, 0342
Superscan
0013, 0178
SuperTech
0277, 0320, 0323
Supra
0323, 0343
Supre-Macy
0057
Supreme
0055, 0107
Susumu
0340
Sutron
0323, 0343
SVA
0151
Sydney
0277, 0282, 0342
Sylvania
0008, 0009, 0010,
0011, 0013, 0026,
0048, 0050, 0051,
0128, 0227, 0253
Symphonic
0051, 0058, 0062,
0128, 0179, 0215
Syntax
0199
Syntax-Brillian 0199
Sysline
0349
Sytong
0277
Tandy
0178, 0282, 0336,
0340, 0342, 0347
Tashiko
0277, 0282, 0342,
0344, 0346
Tatung
0052, 0177, 0282,
0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
TCM
0337, 0343
Teac
0282, 0320
Tec
0282, 0323, 0342,
0343
Technics
0017, 0023, 0056
TechniSat
0274, 0496, 0497,
0499
Techwood
0008, 0023, 0026,
0056
TEDELEX
0282
Teknika
0007, 0008, 0010,
0012, 0026, 0053,
0054, 0058, 0059,
0179
Teleavia
0345
Telecor
0282, 0320
Telefunken
0320, 0322, 0345,
0350
Telegazi
0320
Telemeister
0320
Telesonic
0320
Telestar
0320
Teletech
0320, 0323, 0343,
0349
Teleton
0282, 0342
Televideon
0277
Televiso
0321
Tensai
0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0343, 0350
-3-
Tesmet
Tevion
Texet
0350
0337, 0343
0277, 0282, 0323,
0342
Thomson
0162, 0188, 0189,
0285, 0320, 0322,
0342, 0345, 0350
Thorn
0320, 0349
TMK
0008, 0026, 0031
TNCi
0030
Tokai
0282, 0320, 0350
Tokyo
0277, 0342
Tomashi
0348
Toshiba
0018, 0019, 0040,
0041, 0046, 0073,
0100, 0103, 0108,
0109, 0111, 0121,
0132, 0166, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0217,
0260, 0268, 0282,
0283, 0293, 0304,
0306, 0307, 0329,
0344, 0355, 0454
Totevision
0007
Towada
0282, 0347
Trakton
0282
Trans Continens 0282, 0320
Transtec
0277
Trident
0282
Triumph
0320
Uher
0161, 0171, 0320,
0347, 0350
Ultravox
0277, 0320, 0339,
0341, 0342
Unic Line
0320
United
0349
Universum
0161, 0171, 0282,
0320, 0337, 0349,
0350, 0351
Univox
0320
Vector Research 0050
Vestel
0282, 0320, 0346,
0347, 0349, 0350,
0351
Vexa
0320, 0323, 0343,
0349
Victor
0015, 0344, 0350
VIDEOLOGIC 0277
Videologique
0277, 0282, 0340,
0342
VideoSystem
0320, 0350
Videotechnic
0277, 0282
Vidikron
0010
Vidtech
0008, 0026, 0031,
0053
Viewsonic
0176, 0203, 0232,
0364
Viking
0057
Viore
0148
Visiola
0277, 0342
Vision
0282, 0320, 0350
Vizio
0008, 0177, 0218,
0242, 0500, 0501,
0502, 0503, 0506
Vortec
0320, 0349, 0350
Voxson
0171, 0320, 0339,
0346, 0347, 0350
Waltham
0282, 0320, 0342
Wards
0008, 0009, 0010,
0026, 0031, 0048,
0049, 0050, 0053,
0054, 0059
Watson
0320, 0349, 0350
Watt Radio
0277, 0341, 0342
Waycon
0111
Wega
0320, 0339, 0344
Wegavox
0323
Weltblick
0282, 0320, 0349,
0350
Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220
White Westinghouse
0037, 0090, 0277,
0320, 0341, 0342,
0349
Wincom
0101, 0106
Xrypton
0320
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
Yoko
Yorx
Zanussi
Zenith
0008, 0026, 0050,
0053, 0080, 0081,
0082, 0083, 0086,
0087
0282, 0320
0320
0161, 0277, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350
0340
0282, 0346
0008, 0028, 0029,
0030, 0031, 0054,
0061, 0062
VCR
ABS
Adventura
Adyson
Aiwa
1016
1069
1008
1024, 1026, 1027,
1069
Akai
1021, 1027
Akiba
1008, 1029
Akura
1008, 1027, 1029
Alba
1008, 1009, 1024,
1025, 1029, 1030
Alienware
1016
Ambassador
1030
American High 1068
Amstrad
1008, 1009, 1026
Anitech
1008, 1029
Apex
1088
ASA
1028, 1031
Asha
1070
Asuka
1008, 1026, 1028,
1029, 1031
Audio Dynamics 1064
Audiosonic
1009
Audiovox
1071
Baird
1009, 1025, 1026,
1027
Bang & Olufsen 1017
Basic Line
1008, 1009, 1024,
1025, 1029, 1030
Baur
1028
Beaumark
1070
Bell & Howell 1065
Bestar
1009, 1025, 1030
Black Panther Line
1009, 1025
Blaupunkt
1028
Bondstec
1008, 1030
Broksonic
1100
Bush
1008, 1009, 1024,
1025, 1029, 1049,
1051, 1063, 1217
Calix
1071
Candle
1070, 1071
Canon
1068
Cathay
1009
Catron
1030
CGE
1026, 1027
Cimline
1008, 1024, 1029
CineVision
1104
Citizen
1070, 1071
Clatronic
1008, 1030
Colortyme
1064
Condor
1009, 1025, 1030
Craig
1070, 1071
Crown
1008, 1009, 1025,
1029, 1030
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070
Cybernex
1070
CyberPower
1016
Daewoo
1009, 1025, 1030,
1038, 1069, 1223
Dansai
1008, 1009, 1029
Dantax
1024
Daytron
1009, 1025
DBX
1064
De Graaf
1028
Decca
1026, 1027, 1028
Dell
1016
Denko
1008
DiamondVision 1096
DigiFusion
1014
DIRECTV
1019, 1105, 1110,
1111, 1113, 1116,
1122
Dish Network 1018
Dishpro
1018
Dual
1009, 1027, 1028
Dumont
1026, 1028
Durabrand
1114
Dynatech
1069
Echostar
1018
Elbe
1009
Elcatech
1008
Electrohome
1071
Electrophonic 1071
Elsay
1008
Elta
1008, 1009, 1029
Emerson
1008, 1020, 1068,
1069, 1071
ESC
1009, 1025
Etzuko
1008, 1029
Expressvu
1018
Ferguson
1027
Fidelity
1008, 1026
Finlandia
1028
Finlux
1026, 1027, 1028
Firstline
1008, 1024, 1029,
1031
Fisher
1065
Flint
1024
Formenti/Phoenix 1028
Frontech
1030
Fuji
1068
Fujitsu
1026
Funai
1026, 1069
Galaxy
1026
Garrard
1069
Gateway
1016
GBC
1029, 1030
GE
1068, 1070
GEC
1028
Geloso
1029
General
1030
General Technic 1024
GOI
1018
GoldHand
1008, 1029
Goldstar
1026, 1031, 1064,
1071
Goodmans
1008, 1009, 1025,
1026, 1029, 1030,
1031
Gradiente
1069
Graetz
1027
Granada
1028
Grandin
1008, 1009, 1025,
1026, 1029, 1030,
1031
Grundig
1028, 1029
Hanseatic
1009, 1028, 1031
Harley Davidson 1069
Harman/Kardon 1064
Harwood
1008
HCM
1008, 1029
Headquarter
1065
Hewlett Packard 1016
Hinari
1008, 1009, 1024,
1029
Hisawa
1024
Hitachi
1011, 1026, 1027,
1028, 1046, 1062
HNS
1110
Howard Computers
1016
HP
1016
HTS
1018
Hughes
1111, 1113, 1122
Hughes Network Systems
1110, 1116
Humax
1012, 1110, 1113
Hush
1016
Hypson
1008, 1009, 1024,
1029
iBUYPOWER 1016
Impego
1030
Imperial
1026
Inno Hit
1008, 1009, 1025,
1028, 1029, 1030
Innovation
1024
Instant Replay 1068
Interbuy
1008, 1031
Interfunk
Intervision
Irradio
ITT
ITV
JC Penney
1028
1009, 1026
1008, 1029, 1031
1027
1009, 1025, 1031
1064, 1065, 1068,
1070, 1071
JCL
1068
JVC
1007, 1018, 1027,
1039, 1064, 1065,
1066, 1067, 1078,
1089, 1092, 1093,
1094, 1095, 1113,
1208, 1209, 1212,
1213, 1215, 1218
Kaisui
1008, 1029
Karcher
1028
Kendo
1008, 1024, 1025,
1030
Kenwood
1027, 1064, 1065
Kodak
1068, 1071
Korpel
1008, 1029
Kyoto
1008
Lenco
1025
Leyco
1008, 1029
LG
1010, 1026, 1031,
1047, 1054, 1056,
1071, 1103, 1221
Lifetec
1024
Linksys
1016
Lloyd's
1069
Loewe Opta
1028, 1031
Logik
1008, 1029
Lumatron
1009, 1025
Luxor
1008
LXI
1071
M Electronic
1026
Magnavox
1020, 1068, 1114,
1126
Magnin
1071
Manesth
1008, 1029
Marantz
1028, 1064, 1065,
1068
Mark
1009
Marta
1071
Matsui
1024, 1031
Matsushita
1068
Media Center PC 1016
Mediator
1028
Medion
1024
MEI
1068
Memorex
1023, 1026, 1031,
1065, 1068, 1069,
1070, 1071, 1098,
1114
Memphis
1008, 1029
MGN Technology 1070
Micromaxx
1024
Microsoft
1016
Microstar
1024
Migros
1026
Mind
1016
Mitsubishi
1026, 1028, 1079
Motorola
1068
MTC
1070
Multitech
1008, 1026, 1028,
1029, 1030, 1069,
1070
Murphy
1026
NEC
1027, 1064, 1065
Neckermann
1027, 1028
NEI
1028
Nesco
1008, 1029
Nikkai
1008, 1009, 1030
Nikko
1071
Niveus Media 1016
Noblex
1070
Nokia
1009, 1027
Nordmende
1027
Northgate
1016
Oceanic
1026, 1027
Okano
1008, 1009, 1024
Olympus
1068
Optimus
1071
Orion
1023, 1024, 1051,
1115, 1217
Orson
1026
Osaki
1008, 1026, 1029,
1031
-4-
Otto Versand
Palladium
1028
1008, 1027, 1029,
1031
Panasonic
1000, 1022, 1044,
1055, 1068, 1072,
1085, 1090, 1091,
1120, 1121, 1214
Pathe Marconi 1027
Perdio
1026
Philco
1008, 1068
Philips
1006, 1013, 1028,
1035, 1040, 1045,
1046, 1050, 1058,
1059, 1061, 1068,
1076, 1101, 1110,
1113, 1116, 1117,
1122, 1126, 1210,
1211
Philips Magnavox 1076
Phonola
1028
Pilot
1071
Pioneer
1028, 1036
Polaroid
1088, 1099
Portland
1009, 1025, 1030
Prinz
1026
Profex
1029
Proline
1026
Proscan
1019
Prosonic
1009, 1024
Pulsar
1114
Pye
1028, 1102
Quarter
1065
Quartz
1065
Quasar
1068
Quelle
1026, 1028
Radialva
1008
RadioShack
1071
RadioShack/Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069,
1070, 1071
Radiola
1028
Radix
1071
Randex
1071
RCA
1019, 1068, 1070,
1075, 1110, 1113,
1122, 1125
Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069,
1070, 1071
ReplayTV
1022, 1123
Rex
1027
RFT
1008, 1028, 1030
Ricavision
1016
Roadstar
1008, 1009, 1025,
1029, 1031
Royal
1008
Runco
1114
Saba
1027
Saisho
1024, 1029
Samsung
1002, 1034, 1041,
1043, 1057, 1060,
1070, 1084, 1110,
1116, 1122, 1124,
1220, 1222
Samurai
1008, 1030
Sanky
1114
Sansui
1023, 1027, 1106,
1115
Sanyo
1032, 1065, 1070
Saville
1009
SBR
1028
Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027
Schneider
1008, 1009, 1024,
1025, 1026, 1028,
1029, 1030, 1031
Sears
1065, 1068, 1071
SEG
1008, 1009, 1029
SEI-Sinudyne 1028
Seleco
1027
Sentra
1008, 1030
Sentron
1008, 1029
Sharp
1003, 1033, 1077,
1107, 1127, 1219
Shintom
1008, 1029
Shivaki
1031
Shogun
1070
Siemens
1031
Silva
1031
Silver
1009
Singer
1068
Sinudyne
Solavox
Sonic Blue
Sonneclair
Sonoko
Sontec
Sony
1028
1030
1022, 1123
1008
1009, 1025
1031
1001, 1016, 1048,
1053, 1073, 1074,
1080, 1081, 1082,
1083, 1108, 1118,
1216
Stack
1016
Stack 9
1016
Standard
1009, 1025
Stern
1009
STS
1068
Sunkai
1024
Sunstar
1026
Suntronic
1026
Sunwood
1008, 1029
Superscan
1020
Sylvania
1020, 1068, 1069,
1102, 1126
Symphonic
1008, 1069, 1126
Systemax
1016
Tagar Systems 1016
Taisho
1024
Tandberg
1009
Tandy
1065
Tashiko
1026, 1071
Tatung
1026, 1027, 1028
TCM
1015, 1024, 1042
Teac
1009, 1069
Tec
1008, 1009, 1030
Technics
1068
Teknika
1068, 1069, 1071
Teleavia
1027
Telefunken
1027
Teletech
1008, 1009
Tenosal
1008, 1029
Tensai
1008, 1026, 1029,
1031
Tevion
1024
Thomson
1005, 1027
Thorn
1027
Tivo
1108, 1110, 1111,
1113, 1117, 1118,
1119, 1122
TMK
1070
Tokai
1008, 1029, 1031
Tonsai
1029
Toshiba
1004, 1016, 1027,
1028, 1037, 1049,
1052, 1086, 1087,
1097, 1109, 1112,
1194
Totevision
1070, 1071
Touch
1016
Towada
1008, 1029
Towika
1008, 1029
TVA
1030
Uher
1031
UltimateTV
1019
Ultravox
1009
Unitech
1070
United Quick Star 1009, 1025
Universum
1026, 1028, 1031
Vector Research 1064
Video Concepts 1064
Videon
1024
Videosonic
1070
Viewsonic
1016
Voodoo
1016
Wards
1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
Weltblick
1031
XR-1000
1068, 1069
Yamaha
1064, 1065
Yamishi
1008, 1029
Yokan
1008, 1029
Yoko
1008, 1029, 1030,
1031
Zenith
1114
ZT Group
1016
DVD
4Kus
2051
Accurian
Advent
AEG
Airis
Aiwa
Akai
2142
2155, 2251
2362
2364
2322
2145, 2177, 2179,
2248
Akura
2356
Alba
2064, 2165, 2186,
2337, 2346
Alco
2149
Alize
2361
Allegro
2133
Amitech
2362
Amphion MediaWorks
2195
AMW
2195, 2363
Apex
2030, 2124, 2125,
2126, 2127, 2130,
2131
Apple
2241
Arrgo
2138
Asono
2364
Aspire
2152, 2222
Astar
2240
ATACOM
2364
Audiovox
2061, 2149
Avious
2367
Awa
2363
Axion
2249
Bang & Olufsen 2128
Baze
2367
BBK
2364
Bellagio
2363
Best Buy
2359
Blaupunkt
2131
Blue Parade
2157
Boghe
2382
Brainwave
2362
Brandt
2148, 2188
Broksonic
2145, 2146
Bush
2064, 2110, 2170,
2268, 2290, 2346,
2358, 2367, 2383
California Audio Labs
2151
Cambridge Audio 2354
CAT
2352, 2353
CAVS
2192
Centrum
2353
CGV
2354, 2362
Changhong
2140
Cinetec
2363
CineVision
2133, 2237
Clatronic
2358, 2367
Coby
2031, 2046, 2360
Conia
2383
Continental Edison
2363
Crown
2362
C-Tech
2355
Curtis Mathes 2139
CVG
2377
CyberHome
2022, 2098, 2138,
2187, 2336
Cytron
2244
Daenyx
2363
Daewoo
2001, 2133, 2276,
2298, 2330, 2362,
2363, 2377
Daewoo International
2363
Dalton
2357
Dansai
2362, 2381
Daytek
2184, 2195, 2363
Dayton
2363
DEC
2358
Decca
2362
Denon
2059, 2151, 2193,
2332
Denver
2356, 2358, 2360,
2370
Denzel
2380
Desay
2205
Diamond
2354, 2355
DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Disney
2010, 2028
DK Digital
2339
Dmtech
2176
Dual
2380
Durabrand
2136
DVX
2355
Easy Home
2359
Eclipse
2354
E-Dem
2364
Electrohome
2362
Elin
2362
Elta
2341, 2361, 2362
Emerson
2129, 2137, 2150
Enterprise
2129
Enzer
2380
Epson
2247
ESA
2137
Finlux
2354, 2362, 2367
Fintec
2377
Fisher
2134
Funai
2137
Gateway
2051
GE
2029, 2131, 2156
Gericom
2351
GFM
2226
Giec
2382
Global Solutions 2355
Global Sphere 2355
Go Video
2133, 2213
Goodmans
2165, 2280, 2291,
2358, 2371, 2376,
2382
GPX
2227
Gradiente
2151
Graetz
2380
Greenhill
2131
Grundig
2349
Grunkel
2362, 2366
GVG
2377
H&B
2358
H_her
2364
Haaz
2354, 2355
Haier
2254
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135
HiMAX
2359
Hitachi
2062, 2090, 2115,
2274, 2282, 2316,
2359, 2380
Hiteker
2130
Home Tech Industries
2364
Hyundai
2366
Ilo
2245
Initial
2131, 2245
Innovation
2182
Insignia
2002, 2137, 2253
Integra
2157
Irradio
2053
iSymphony
2246
JBL
2135
JVC
2020, 2096, 2097,
2099, 2100, 2101,
2102, 2103, 2106,
2107, 2160, 2257,
2260, 2262, 2263,
2321, 2324, 2326,
2327, 2343, 2464,
2465, 2468, 2469,
2471
Jwin
2198
Kansai
2360
Kawasaki
2149
Kennex
2362
Kenwood
2041, 2151, 2348
KeyPlug
2362
Kiiro
2362
Kingavon
2358
Kiss
2380
KLH
2131, 2149
Koda
2358
Koss
2013, 2148, 2158
KXD
2359
Landel
2143
Lasonic
2132
Lawson
2355
Lecson
2381
Lenco
2358, 2362, 2367
Lenoxx
2136, 2153
-5-
LG
Life
Lifetec
Limit
Liquid Video
Liteon
Loewe
LogicLab
Magnavox
Magnex
Majestic
Marantz
Marquant
Matsui
McIntosh
Mecotek
Medion
Memorex
MiCO
Micromaxx
Microsoft
Microstar
Minoka
Minowa
Mintek
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Monyka
Mustek
Mx Onda
Mystral
Naiko
Nesa
Neufunk
Nevir
Next Base
Nexxtech
NU-TEC
Onkyo
Oopla
Oppo
Optim
Optimus
Orava
Orbit
Orion
Oritron
P&B
Pacific
Panasonic
Parasound
peeKTON
Philips
Phonotrend
Pioneer
2002, 2033, 2038,
2057, 2129, 2133,
2189, 2191, 2223,
2238, 2270, 2288,
2335, 2373, 2375
2182
2182
2355
2158
2043, 2051, 2142
2320
2355
2025, 2050, 2137,
2150, 2159, 2224,
2230, 2358
2367
2360
2328
2362
2148, 2378
2199
2362
2182
2028, 2145, 2234
2354, 2382
2182
2156
2182
2362
2367
2131, 2245
2003
2358, 2359
2380
2186
2354
2366
2362
2131
2380
2362
2143
2243
2383
2159, 2368
2051
2196, 2255
2381
2180
2358
2363
2073, 2110
2148, 2158
2358
2355
2011, 2024, 2034,
2042, 2058, 2062,
2066, 2067, 2093,
2116, 2117, 2118,
2119, 2120, 2121,
2122, 2123, 2151,
2159, 2164, 2166,
2167, 2172, 2173,
2175, 2209, 2214,
2275, 2277, 2278,
2281, 2282, 2283,
2301, 2374, 2470
2197
2364
2008, 2012, 2025,
2044, 2050, 2051,
2053, 2060, 2072,
2108, 2111, 2147,
2159, 2163, 2169,
2174, 2181, 2185,
2230, 2261, 2266,
2267, 2286, 2287,
2289, 2295, 2300,
2302, 2317, 2328,
2338, 2342, 2350,
2467
2367
2016, 2017, 2018,
2019, 2035, 2092,
2094, 2095, 2109,
2157, 2180, 2190,
2212, 2269, 2272,
2299, 2304, 2305,
2306, 2307, 2308,
2309, 2310, 2311,
2344, 2345, 2347,
2379
Pointer
2362
Polaroid
2125, 2215, 2235
Portland
2362
Powerpoint
2363
Prima
2252
Proceed
2130
Proscan
2156
Prosonic
2360, 2377
Protron
2202
Provision
2358
Pye
2144
Qwestar
2148
Raite
2380
RCA
2021, 2029, 2104,
2105, 2131, 2149,
2156, 2157, 2229
RedStar
2356, 2360, 2362
Regent
2153
Reoc
2355
Rimax
2361
Rio
2133
Roadstar
2331, 2358
Ronin
2363
Rotel
2203
Rowa
2154, 2383
Rownsonic
2353
Saba
2148, 2188
Sabaki
2355
Saivod
2362
Sampo
2141
Samsung
2000, 2045, 2077,
2112, 2113, 2114,
2115, 2151, 2200,
2216, 2219, 2228,
2264, 2265, 2271,
2279, 2294, 2303,
2329, 2365
Sansui
2073, 2145, 2354,
2355, 2362
Sanyo
2134, 2145, 2217,
2292
ScanMagic
2186
Schaub Lorenz 2362
Schneider
2176
Scientific Labs 2355
Scott
2161, 2357
Seeltech
2364
SEG
2162, 2355, 2363,
2380
Sharp
2006, 2040, 2088,
2091, 2182, 2194,
2220, 2221, 2231,
2236, 2293, 2340
Shinsonic
2245
Sigmatek
2359, 2364
Silva
2356
Singer
2354, 2355
Skymaster
2325, 2355
Skyworth
2356
Slim Art
2362
SM Electronic 2355
Sonic Blue
2133
Sontech
2366
Sony
2004, 2005, 2007,
2009, 2014, 2015,
2023, 2026, 2027,
2052, 2068, 2069,
2070, 2071, 2074,
2075, 2084, 2085,
2087, 2168, 2171,
2208, 2210, 2211,
2258, 2273, 2284,
2285, 2312, 2313,
2314, 2315, 2318,
2319, 2466
Soundmaster
2355
Soundmax
2355
Spectra
2363
Spectroniq
2201
Standard
2355
Star Cluster
2355
Starmedia
2358, 2364
Sungale
2204
Sunkai
2362
Superscan
2150
Supervision
2355
Sylvania
2012, 2137, 2150,
2178, 2230, 2239
Symphonic
2108, 2230
Synn
2355
T.D.E. Systems 2366
Tatung
2001, 2362
TCM
2182, 2297
Teac
2149, 2333, 2355,
2383
Tec
2356
Technics
2151
Technika
2362, 2367
Telefunken
2353
Tensai
2362
Tevion
2182, 2355, 2357
Theta Digital
2157
Thomson
2183, 2188, 2334,
2372
Tokai
2356, 2380
Top Suxess
2364
Toshiba
2032, 2036, 2037,
2039, 2048, 2049,
2054, 2055, 2072,
2073, 2076, 2078,
2079, 2086, 2145,
2159, 2218, 2233,
2256, 2259, 2296,
2369
TRANScontinents 2363, 2367
Transonic
2367
Trio
2362
Trutech
2242
TruVision
2359
TSM
2364
Umax
2361
United
2367
Urban Concepts 2159
US Logic
2245
Venturer
2149
Viewmaster
2364
Vocopro
2206
VocoStar
2207
Waitec
2364
Welltech
2382
Westinghouse 2063, 2250
Wharfedale
2354, 2355
Woxter
2361, 2364
Xbox
2156, 2183
Xlogic
2355, 2362
XMS
2362
Xoro
2382
Yamada
2051, 2361, 2363
Yamaha
2056, 2064, 2065,
2080, 2081, 2082,
2083, 2089, 2118,
2151, 2323
Yamakawa
2363, 2380
Yukai
2186
Zenith
2002, 2129, 2133,
2159, 2223
Blu-ray Disc
LG
Panasonic
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Yamaha
2033
2011, 2209, 2214
2212
2045, 2113
2194, 2220, 2221
2075
2064, 2474
DVR
Bush
Hitachi
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Yamaha
2110
2090
2066, 2067, 2093,
2116, 2117, 2119,
2120, 2122, 2123
2108, 2111
2016, 2017, 2018,
2019, 2092, 2094,
2095, 2109
2105
2113, 2219
2088, 2091
2084, 2085, 2087
2086
2089, 2118
DVD Recorder
Aspire
Astar
Broksonic
Go Video
Hitachi
Insignia
Irradio
JVC
LG
Liteon
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Sony
Sylvania
Toshiba
Yamaha
2222
2240
2146
2213
2062
2002
2053
2100, 2101, 2106,
2107
2033, 2057, 2223,
2238
2043
2011, 2034, 2058,
2062, 2116, 2117,
2119, 2120, 2121,
2123
2008, 2044, 2050,
2051, 2147
2017, 2035
2144
2000, 2112, 2216
2073
2217
2004, 2005, 2007,
2052, 2068, 2069,
2074, 2208, 2210,
2211
2239
2032, 2036, 2037,
2039, 2049, 2054,
2055, 2076
2056
Cable
ABC
3002, 3003, 3017,
3066, 3067, 3086,
3093, 3119, 3122
ADB
3020
Adelphia
3081
Alcatel
3016
Americast
3124
Amstrad
3022, 3098
Antronix
3065, 3070
Archer
3070
Arcon
3098
AT&T
3095
Axis
3098
Bell South
3124
Cable Vision
3092
Cabletenna
3065
Cabletime
3104
Cableview
3087
Clearmaster
3127
ClearMax
3127
Clyde Cablevision 3105
Colour Voice
3068
Comcast
3084, 3088, 3117
Comcrypt
3107
Comtronics
3069
Contec
3074
Coolmax
3127
COX
3084
Cryptovision
3110
Director
3084
Eastern
3075
Everquest
3123
Fidelity
3098
Filmnet
3107
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3111
Filmnet Comcrypt
3111
Finlux
3097
Focus
3126
Foxtel
3022
France Telecom 3100, 3101
Freebox
3023
GC Electronics 3070
GE
3066, 3093
GEC
3105
Gemini
3072, 3123
General Instrument
3017, 3025, 3066,
3084, 3090, 3096,
3117
-6-
Goldstar
Gooding
Grundig
Hamlin
Hirschmann
Hitachi
HomeChoice
Humax
ITT Nokia
Jasco
Jerrold
3120
3099
3098, 3099
3073, 3078
3097
3066
3106
3021, 3080, 3083
3097
3123
3017, 3018, 3025,
3066, 3072, 3084,
3090, 3096, 3119,
3123
JVC
3099
Kabel Deutschland
3024, 3027, 3121
Macab
3101
Magnavox
3079
Maspro
3099
Matsui
3099
MegaCable
3117
Memorex
3076, 3122
Minerva
3099
Mnet
3107
Motorola
3025, 3026, 3084,
3088, 3090, 3095,
3117
Movie Time
3077, 3109
Mr Zapp
3101
Multichoice
3107
Multitech
3127
NEC
3064
NET Brazil
3085
Nokia
3097
Noos
3101
NSC
3077
Oak
3074
Pace
3006, 3089, 3121
Palladium
3099
Panasonic
3112, 3118, 3122
Paragon
3122
Philips
3068, 3071, 3079,
3099, 3100, 3101,
3103
Pioneer
3001, 3006, 3094,
3098, 3114, 3116,
3120
Popular Mechanics
3126
Proscan
3066, 3093
Pulsar
3122
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3018
Quasar
3122
RadioShack
3123, 3127
RCA
3030, 3031, 3087,
3118
Realistic
3070
Recoton
3126
Regal
3078
Regency
3075
Rembrandt
3066
Runco
3122
Sagem
3101
Samsung
3069, 3089, 3114,
3120
SAT
3098
Scientific Atlanta 3000, 3001, 3002,
3003, 3006, 3028,
3029, 3081, 3086,
3089, 3094, 3095,
3108
Signal
3072, 3123
Signature
3066
Sony
3092, 3125
Sprucer
3118
Standard Component
3115
Starcom
3017, 3072, 3119,
3123
Stargate
3072, 3123
Starquest
3072, 3123
Supercable
3090
Supermax
3127
Tele+1
3107, 3111
Telepiu
3107
Thomson
3082, 3091
TIME WARNER 3084
Tocom
Torx
Toshiba
Tristar
Tudi
Tusa
TV86
Unika
United Cable
Universal
Universum
V2
Videoway
View Star
Viewmaster
Vision
Visiopass
Vortex View
Wittenberg
Zenith
Zentek
3067
3017
3122
3127
3102
3072, 3123
3077
3065, 3070
3018, 3119
3065, 3070
3097, 3099
3127
3019
3074, 3077, 3079
3127
3127
3097, 3100, 3101
3127
3098
3113, 3122, 3124
3126
Sattelite
AB Sat
AccessHD
ADB
AGS
Akai
Alba
4216, 4217
4104
4220
4216
4053, 4055
4001, 4004, 4006,
4007, 4062, 4217
Aldes
4005, 4007, 4010
Allsat
4048, 4053, 4055
Allsonic
4005, 4008, 4024
Alltech
4217
Alpha
4053
Alpha Digital
4104
Alphastar
4077
Amitronica
4217
Amstrad
4011, 4035, 4217,
4218
Anglo
4217
Ankaro
4005, 4008, 4024,
4217
Anttron
4001, 4004
Apollo
4001
Armstrong
4011, 4053
Artec
4100
Asat
4053, 4055
ASLF
4217
Astacom
4216
Astra
4009, 4011, 4054,
4217, 4219
Astro
4004, 4008, 4010,
4015, 4024, 4213,
4218, 4219
AudioTon
4004, 4048
Aurora
4222
Austar
4222
Axiel
4216
Axis
4008, 4009, 4024,
4050
Best
4008, 4024
Blaupunkt
4015
Blue Sky
4217
Boca
4011, 4054, 4059,
4217
Boston
4216
Brain Wave
4013
Broadcast
4012
Broco
4217
BSkyB
4035, 4041
BT
4216
Bubu Sat
4217
Bush
4006, 4045
Cambridge
4218
Canal Satellite 4213
Canal+
4213
CaptiveWorks 4099
Channel Master 4007, 4110
Chaparral
4075
CHEROKEE
4216
Chess
4212, 4217
CityCom
4006, 4215, 4219
Clatronic
4013
CNT
4010
Comag
4080, 4081, 4082,
4083, 4086
Commlink
Comtech
Condor
Connexions
Conrad
4005
4050
4008, 4024, 4219
4014, 4024
4024, 4215, 4218,
4219
Conrad Electronic 4217, 4219
Contec
4050
Coolsat
4096
Cosat
4048
Coship
4109
Crown
4011
Daeryung
4014
Daewoo
4057, 4217
DDC
4007
Delega
4007
Dew
4050
Diamond
4051
Digiality
4219
Digital Stream 4105
DIRECTV
4056, 4064, 4067,
4068, 4070, 4071,
4074, 4107, 4116,
4119, 4121, 4122,
4123, 4127, 4192,
4193, 4194, 4195,
4196, 4197, 4198,
4199, 4200, 4201,
4202, 4203, 4206,
4207, 4221
Discoverer
4212
Discovery
4216
Diseqc
4216
Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089,
4092, 4094, 4095,
4117
Dishpro
4018, 4117
Distrisat
4053
Ditristrad
4048
DNT
4014, 4053, 4055
Drake
4072
DStv
4222
Dune
4024
Echostar
4014, 4018, 4065,
4089, 4117, 4217
Einhell
4001, 4005, 4011,
4217, 4218
Elap
4216, 4217
Elekta
4010
Elsat
4217
Elta
4001, 4008, 4024,
4048, 4053, 4055
Emanon
4001
Emme Esse
4008, 4024
Engel
4217
Ep Sat
4006
EURIEULT
4031
Eurodec
4052
Europa
4053, 4218, 4219
Europhon
4219
Eurosat
4011
Eurosky
4024, 4011, 4008,
4215, 4218, 4219
Eurostar
4011, 4215, 4219
Eutelsat
4217
Exator
4001, 4004
Expressvu
4117
Fenner
4024, 4212, 4217
Ferguson
4006, 4052, 4214
Fidelity
4218
Finlandia
4006
Finlux
4006
FinnSat
4050, 4052
Flair Mate
4217
Foxtel
4222
Freecom
4001, 4049, 4218
FTEmaximal
4024, 4217
Fuba
4024, 4001, 4008,
4014, 4015, 4055,
4215
Galaxis
4024, 4005, 4008,
4009, 4050, 4048,
4215, 4222
GE
4093, 4066, 4111,
4197
General Instrument
4073, 4019
GMI
4011
GOI
4117
Goldbox
GoldStar
Goodmans
Goodmind
Grandin
Grothusen
Grundig
4213
4049
4029, 4002, 4006
4111
4031
4001, 4049
4006, 4004, 4015,
4035, 4211, 4218,
4222
Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Hantor
4001, 4013
Hanuri
4010
Hauppauge
4044
Heliocom
4219
Helium
4219
Hinari
4007
Hirschmann
4024, 4015, 4210,
4218, 4219, 4216
Hisawa
4013
Hisense
4016
Hitachi
4114, 4006, 4199,
4203
Homecast
4087, 4084, 4085
Houston
4048
HTS
4117
Hughes
4064, 4068, 4194,
4192, 4196, 4202
Hughes Network Systems
4071
Humax
4097, 4025, 4030,
4060
Huth
4005, 4011, 4012,
4013, 4050, 4048,
4219, 4223
Hypson
4031
Ilo
4016
Imex
4031
Innovation
4008
Insignia
4107
Intertronic
4011
Intervision
4048, 4219
ITT Nokia
4006
Jerrold
4019
Johansson
4013
JOK
4216
JSR
4048
JVC
4089, 4065, 4117,
4029
Kamm
4217
Kathrein
4015, 4055, 4053,
4063, 4034, 4042,
4215, 4216, 4217
Kathrein Eurostar 4215
Klap
4216
Konig
4219
Kosmos
4049
KR
4004
Kreiselmeyer
4015
K-SAT
4217
Kyostar
4001
L&S Electronic 4024
Lasat
4024, 4010, 4008,
4054, 4215, 4212,
4219
Lasonic
4108
Lenco
4024, 4001, 4049,
4215, 4219, 4217
Leng
4013
Lennox
4048
Lenson
4218
Lexus
4053
LG
4103, 4107, 4049
Lifesat
4024, 4008, 4212,
4217
Lifetec
4008
Lorenzen
4219
Lorraine
4049
Lupus
4024, 4008
Luxor
4218
Lyonnaise
4052
Macab
4052
Magnavox
4127, 4101
Manata
4031, 4216, 4217
Manhattan
4006, 4010, 4048,
4216
Marantz
4055
Mascom
4010
Maspro
4006, 4217
Matsui
4216
-7-
Max
Mediabox
Mediamarkt
Mediasat
Medion
Medison
Mega
Memorex
Metronic
4219
4213
4011
4009, 4213, 4218
4024, 4008, 4217
4217
4055, 4053
4127
4031, 4028, 4001,
4004, 4005, 4010,
4217
Metz
4015
Micro electronic 4218, 4219, 4217
Micro Technology 4217
MicroGem
4106
Micromaxx
4024, 4008
Microstar
4008
Microtec
4217
Minerva
4015
Mitsubishi
4006, 4015, 4202
Mitsumi
4054
Morgan's
4011, 4054, 4055,
4053, 4217
Motorola
4090, 4091, 4088,
4019
Multichoice
4222
Multitec
4212
Muratto
4049
Mysat
4217
Navex
4013
Neuhaus
4009, 4048, 4218,
4219, 4217
Neusat
4217
Next Level
4019
NextWave
4223
Nikko
4011, 4217
Nokia
4006, 4040
Nordmende
4001, 4006, 4007,
4010, 4052
Nova
4222
Novis
4013
Oceanic
4051
Octagon
4001, 4004, 4050
Okano
4011
Optex
4048
Optus
4213, 4222, 4223
Orbitech
4001, 4212, 4213,
4218
OSat
4004
Otto Versand
4015
Pace
4006, 4015, 4035,
4043, 4047, 4216
Pacific
4051
Packsat
4216
Palcom
4007
Palladium
4011, 4218
Palsat
4212, 4218
Panasat
4222
Panasonic
4121, 4126, 4124,
4006, 4035, 4036,
4221, 4198
Panda
4006, 4219
Pansat
4125
Patriot
4216
Paysat
4127
PCT
4110
Philco
4101
Philips
4071, 4068, 4127,
4006, 4055, 4053,
4061, 4033, 4213,
4216, 4196, 4202,
4203, 4201, 4206
Phoenix
4050
Phonotrend
4006, 4005, 4048
Pioneer
4046, 4213
Polsat
4052
Predki
4013
Premiere
4048, 4213
Priesner
4011
Primestar
4076
Profile
4216
Promax
4006
Prosat
4007, 4005
Proscan
4093, 4066, 4122,
4197
Protek
4051
Proton
4016
Provision
4010
Quadral
Quelle
Quiero
RadioShack
Radiola
Radix
Rainbow
RCA
Realistic
Redpoint
Redstar
RFT
Roadstar
Roch
Rover
Saba
Sabre
Sagem
Sakura
Samsung
SAT
Sat Cruiser
Sat Partner
Sat Team
Satcom
Satec
Satelco
Satford
Satmaster
Satplus
Schneider
Schwaiger
SCS
Seemann
SEG
Seleco
Servi Sat
Siemens
Silva
Skantin
Skardin
4024, 4007, 4005,
4008, 4216
4015, 4215, 4219
4052
4019
4055, 4053
4014, 4037
4004
4093, 4066, 4112,
4113, 4118, 4119,
4116, 4122, 4197,
4207
4078
4009
4024, 4008
4005, 4055, 4053
4217
4031
4024, 4217
4010, 4215, 4219,
4216
4006
4023, 4052
4050
4064, 4071, 4069,
4123, 4120, 4003,
4000, 4001, 4032,
4196, 4200
4007, 4218
4223
4001, 4004, 4010,
4013, 4049, 4218
4217
4012, 4219
4217
4024
4012
4012
4212
4008, 4212, 4216
4051, 4212, 4219
4215
4011, 4009, 4014
4024, 4001, 4008,
4013
4048
4031, 4217
4015
4049
4217
4009
Skinsat
SKR
Skymaster
Skymax
SkySat
Skyvision
SM Electronic
Smart
Sony
SR
Star Choice
Starland
Starring
Start Trak
Strong
STS
STVI
Sumida
Sunny Sound
Sunsat
Sunstar
Supermax
Tandberg
Tandy
Tantec
TCM
Techniland
TechniSat
Technology
Technosat
Technowelt
Teco
Telanor
Telasat
Telecom
Telefunken
Teleka
Telemaster
Telesat
Telestar
Televes
Telewire
Tempo
Tevion
4218
4217
4017, 4022, 4005,
4212, 4217
4055, 4053
4212, 4218, 4219,
4217
4048
4212, 4217
4215, 4217
4067, 4070, 4213
4011, 4054
4019
4217
4013
4001
4024, 4001, 4004,
4008, 4049, 4222
4115
4031
4011
4024
4217
4024, 4011, 4054
4223
4052
4004
4006
4008
4012
4021, 4026, 4027,
4014, 4053, 4038,
4039, 4212, 4213,
4218
4222
4223
4219
4011, 4054
4007
4215, 4219
4217
4017, 4001, 4216
4004, 4011, 4014,
4218, 4219
4010
4219
4212, 4213, 4218
4006, 4218
4048
4223
4008, 4217
Thomson
Thorens
Thorn
Tivax
Tivo
Tokai
Tonna
Toshiba
Triad
Triasat
Triax
Turnsat
Tvonics
Twinner
UEC
Uher
UltimateTV
Uniden
Unisat
Unitor
Universum
US Digital
Variosat
Vega
Ventana
Viewsat
Visiosat
Voom
Vortec
Welltech
WeTeKom
Wevasat
Wewa
Winersat
Wisi
Woorisat
Worldsat
Xrypton
XSat
Zehnder
Zenith
Zodiac
© 2010 Yamaha Corporation
4020, 4006, 4052,
4058, 4208, 4215,
4213, 4219, 4216,
4217
4051
4006
4104
4196
4053
4006, 4012, 4048,
4218, 4217
4194, 4202, 4203
4049
4218
4015, 4215, 4218,
4217
4217
4214
4031, 4217
4222
4212
4070
4079, 4127
4011, 4050, 4053
4013
4015, 4215, 4219
4016
4015
4024
4055, 4053
4098
4013, 4048, 4216,
4217
4019
4001
4212
4212, 4218
4006
4006
4013
4006, 4014, 4015,
4218, 4219
4010
4216
4024
4217
4024, 4010, 4008,
4209, 4215
4102, 4107, 4195
4004
CD
Yamaha
5082, 5095
CD Recorder
Yamaha
5083
MD
Yamaha
5080, 5081, 5086
Tape
Yamaha
5084, 5087
Tuner
Yamaha
5066, 5071, 5085,
5088, 5090, 5092,
5094
XM
Yamaha
5091, 5093
SIRIUS
Yamaha
5064, 5067
DOCK
Yamaha
5068, 5089
NET
Yamaha
5076, 5079
LD
Yamaha
2080
Amplifier
Yamaha
5019, 5020
YC513A0/RC
-8-
AV Receiver
English
Safety Brochure
English
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
7
CAUTION
8
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
9
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
•
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
10
11
12
13
14
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold
with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications
not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,
granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories
and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.
Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all
installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
installed and used according to the instructions found in the users
manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other
electronic devices.
A (Power key)
Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode.
2 En
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is
found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., USA 6660 Orangethorpe Ave.,
Buena Park, CA 90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place - away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust,
moisture, and/or cold. For proper ventilation, allow the following
minimum clearances.
Top: 30 cm, Rear: 20 cm, Sides: 20 cm
Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or
transformers to avoid humming sounds.
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold
to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high
humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation
inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this
unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage
to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this
unit.
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc.
in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside
this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or
personal injury.
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are
complete.
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly
causing damage.
Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp
the plug; do not pull the cable.
Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage
the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit
with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not
be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit
with a voltage other than specified.
To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit
during a lightning storm.
Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.
vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
Be sure to refer to the “Troubleshooting” section of the Owner’s
Manual on the CD-ROM for common operating errors before
concluding that this unit is faulty.
Before moving this unit, press A to set it to standby mode and
disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must
be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC
wall outlet. Voltages are:
...............AC 110/120/220/230-240V, 50/60Hz (General model)
.................................. AC 220/230-240V, 50/60Hz (Asia model)
19 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature
changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cable from the outlet,
then leave this unit alone.
20 When using this unit for a long time, this unit may become warm.
Turn the power off, then leave this unit alone for cooling.
21 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug
can be reached easily.
22 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like. When you dispose of batteries, follow
your regional regulations.
23 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
24 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same
type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are incorrectly
replaced.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as
long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself
is turned off by A. This state is called the standby mode. In
this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
This label is required to be attached to a product of which the
temperature of the top cover may hot during operation.
3 En
■
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Notes on remote controls and batteries
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and -).
Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control narrows
– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim
If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the
remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.
If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries
immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked material. If
the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets
into your eyes or mouth, rinse it away immediately and
consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly
before installing new batteries.
Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may
shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries to
leak.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may
be different even though they look the same.
Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote
control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a
case, install new batteries and set the remote control code.
Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide
slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain
this Owner's Manual in a safe place for future reference.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug
supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an
appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions
described below.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is
often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
4 En
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from
whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our
website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha
undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge
for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been
discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.
Conditions
1 The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a
statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the
product may be returned at the customer’s expense.
2 The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.
3 The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.
4 The following are excluded from this guarantee:
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.
b. Damage resulting from:
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to
ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper
use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in
the country where it is used.
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety
standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.
5 Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.
6 Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the
product.
7 Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.
8 This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising
from their sales/purchase contract.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment
and Used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and
electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to
applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC
and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent
any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from
inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local
municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact
your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the
requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
5 En
© 2010 Yamaha Corporation
YC513A0/SBEN
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.6
Linearized : Yes
Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res
XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702
Modify Date : 2010:06:02 17:02:42-07:00
Create Date : 2010:05:18 16:36:26+09:00
Metadata Date : 2010:06:02 17:02:42-07:00
Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.1
Format : application/pdf
Document ID : uuid:f95b9842-0547-490b-98e2-f63eccc91b19
Instance ID : uuid:d24ecd05-65ac-4d8a-906a-2e2bacda084c
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Has XFA : No
Page Count : 144
Creator : FrameMaker 7.1
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
.